Design Handbook For Schools

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK
EDITION 2006
Research, Innovation & Specifications Unit | Research & Procurement Branch| MOE
Produced by
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006
FOREWORD
The Ministry of Education has invested a great deal of resources into
developing its school buildings. Many existing schools have seen their needs and expectations of school educators and students alike.
facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying
Today, the design direction for schools is towards innovative, adaptable learning, it is an inarguable fact that the schools serve as important
and flexible learning environments. Being centres of teaching and models of inspiration for our young. Schools physical environments, at the same time, serve as the platforms which facilitate their intellectual and physical growth. Thus, it is of concern that our schools be built to be conducive, efficient and easily maintainable.
The collaborative efforts of educators and designers will continue to be helpful in creating desirable spaces to nurture our young. Improvements that are responsive to the changing pedagogical styles will continue to be expected of our school buildings. To assist schools and designers in their tasks, Research & Procurement Branch (RPM) conducted a review of the School Design Handbook and put together existing good practices as well as fresh ideas on school design into this new 2006 edition.
As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering
even more learning points, it is hoped that the information herein would help facility planners to design learning environments that will be meaningful and enriching to both educators and students.
Acknowledgement
Our deepest appreciation to the following for their invaluable input :
Subject Specialists
Educational Technology Division, MOE Curriculum Planning & Development Division, MOE Co-Curricular Activities Branch, Education Programmes Division, MOE
Historical Reference
Public Works Department
MOE also sincerely thanks all parties who have contributed and assisted in one way or another in the production of this new edition of The School Design Handbook.
USERS REFERENCE
Entire Page No. Volume No.
Section No. Section Name
Chapter Name Chapter No. Item No.
Sub-Item No.
Content
Key Point
Revision Series No. / Date
REV-02/MAY 05

EDITION 2006
Vol. 1
Produced by
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording or any other information storage and retrieval systems, without prior permission in writing from the copyright holder. Applications for use of the information within should be addressed to Research & Procurement Branch, Infrastructure & Facility Services Group, Ministry of Education.
FOREWORD
School Design Handbook
> GENERAL <
Vol. 1
CONTENTS
School Design Philosophy
FlexSI Framework and Guideline 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Overview Design Concepts
The FlexSI Framework
FlexSI Design Provisions
Design Considerations 3.1 3.2 3.3 Site Planning Vision Care Introduction
3.4
Safety & Security / Emergency Planning
Appendices 4.1 4.2 4.4
4.3 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9
Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages Illustration of FAVE Space School White Area (SWA)
Possible Classroom Configurations
External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces
School White Area
Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for Primary School Facilities Table Secondary School Facilities Table
Space Norms
Master Revision List Index
REV 00 - FEB 06
1 School Design Philosophy
1
1.0
VOL.
1.1-1
SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
THE SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
The School Design Philosophy embodies the important principles to be addressed in school design and development. The objective is: To develop the school into a physical environment that is conducive to learning and play, one that provides one that serves as the platform for the child to aspire towards his goal. stimuli for the childs mental and physical growth, and
1.1
The objective can be translated in the form of efficient provisions or in the form of interesting design. In whatever form, the objective should foster in the designer the need to: Know the User Examine the Function Encourage Flexibility Ensure Maintainability Respond to the Climate Understand the Site
2.0 2.1
The User Understanding the profile and needs of the user, with respect to the following, is important in any building design. The user is defined by the following terms: Age group primary, secondary or junior college students Gender all-girls, all-boys or co-educational History as a school, whether it has an established past or an identity Specialty whether the school has niche areas or offers special programmes in art, music, life sciences etc Population small capacity, big capacity, single or doublesession Disability needs full handicapped, basic handicapped, visual handicapped etc.
2.2
While the Age Group and Population will affect the scale of the building and building image. The other factors also help to determine other special
components, the other four factors may contribute towards architectural language provisions required by the school.
REV-00 / FEB 06
1
3.0 3.1 Function for.
VOL.
1.1-2
One aspect of function that school designs ought to achieve is spatial efficiency. Spaces must be planned with clearly assigned functions. The operations within the room and the need for particular operations must be addressed and well-catered
3.2
The school ought to also be efficient in its use of resources such as water and energy. Double-volume air conditioning of facilities should be avoided. Corridors and walkways ought to be sufficiently daylit to minimize dependence on artificial lighting. Lux levels provided are to be suitable for rooms of different usages. Excessive water features, like fountains, are discouraged, in view of the need to conserve water and electricity consumption.
3.3
User safety and comfort is another essential component of functional design. User comfort encompasses factors such as general acoustic treatment, vision care and good ventilation, while user safety includes easy supervision, easy movement, good ergonomics and careful detailing.
3.4
Another crucial function of school design is to provide stimulus for the childs creative development and encourage his appreciation of nature and the outdoors.
4.0 4.1
Flexibility In designing the learning environment, there must be a conscious effort by architects to keep up with the dynamic changes in teaching pedagogy. Flexibility would prepare the school organization to adjust to new conditions and demands.
4.2
It has been widely acknowledged that one important consideration to addressing such dynamics is through employing flexibility in design.
4.3
Some ways to achieve flexibility would be to ensure sufficient space and to demarcate appropriate plots for expansion; to cater for multi-purpose and multisize usage of rooms and to encourage sharing of facilities and integrated learning.
REV-00 / FEB 06
1
5.0 5.1
VOL.
1.1-3
Maintainability It is necessary to ensure durability and hardiness of areas that are prone to weathering, wear and tear and vandalism. This aspect of maintainability should be roofing, metal and ironmongery, carpentry or sanitary fittings, among others. captured in the technical specifications and drawings for all types of works, such as
5.2
It is also critical to ensure that the design and assembly of all building and spatial components cater for easy access for maintenance, cleaning, repair and replacement. This would include discouraging the extensive use of certain
materials, e.g. glass; or discouraging certain building design, e.g. curved roofs, curved structures; and avoiding certain building elements, e.g. roof gutters which can cause ponding and lead to mosquito breeding.
5.3
The cost effectiveness of the design component, as seen from its life period, also needs to be considered.
6.0 6.1
The Climate It is important for architects designing schools to consider Singapores tropical climate, especially since 85% of the schools built-up areas are naturally ventilated.
6.2
Some of the ways to address the heat and humidity of the tropical climate include: To orientate the front elevation of the buildings in the Northtransmission devices South direction to minimize direct solar light and heat To provide effective roof overhangs to function as sunshading To introduce more balconies, single loaded corridors cross ventilation
To ensure generous fenestration or openings on walls for good Use of glare-proof materials in external areas Use of moisture-resistant materials in areas that are exposed to
the weather
REV-00 / FEB 06
1
7.0 The Site
VOL.
1.1-4
The site bears topographical features (land form and levels) and a physical
boundary (shape, orientation, frontage). The site also has critical relationship with its neighbours (surrounding buildings, traffic conditions and other users). These serve as pointers that can be used to establish the following:
7.1
Zoning within the site whether the buildings grouped together have compatible uses where the quieter facilities should be located compared with the surrounding where the noisier activities should be housed
7.2
How the buildings should be laid out in terms of massing and height whether the arrangement obstructs the neighbouring building whether it blends in with the general surrounding whether it affects areas reserved for future expansion
7.3
The appropriate location of green spaces and covered spaces
7.4
The orientation of the building blocks in relation to the climate
8.0
Conclusion The encapsulation of all the above as a set of design philosophy serves to guide all parties in the process of planning, detailing, choice of architectural style and image for the school building. adequate facilities to meet educational needs in the best possible way. This is to ensure that our schools continue to have
REV-00 / FEB 06
2 FlexSI Framework and Guideline

2.1
Overview 2.2
Design Concepts 2.3
The FlexSI Framework 2.4 FlexSI Design Provisions
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.1-1
OVERVIEW
1.0
Overview of the Flexible School Infrastructure (FLEX SI)
1.1
The FlexSI Concept The Flexible School Infrastructure (FlexSI) was conceptualised to allow our school leaders more autonomy on the design of their schools, and to create flexible learning spaces and facilities that are sufficiently adaptable in order to support new pedagogies that will better engage our students in learning.
1.2
Objective The new framework will allow primary and secondary schools to design their building infrastructure so that it is sufficiently flexible to adapt to varying as schools embark on new developments in pedagogy. Design Concepts for Functional Flexibility The FlexSI framework proposes for school infrastructure to be designed to achieve the following: a) b) c) Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes / Dimensions Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages Design of External Areas as Learning Spaces classroom capacities, multiple functionalities and cater for future expansions
1.3
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.2-1
DESIGN CONCEPTS
2.0 2.1
Design Concepts Some schools may decide that they need smaller and/or larger classrooms so they can employ different pedagogical approaches, or, so that they can engage students in differentsized group activities. With modular flexibility, schools can choose to vary the size of a classroom in modules of 45 m2 needed, schools can revert to the classrooms standard size and capacity.
Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes
instead of the standard 90 m2. When the flexibility is not
2.2
Schools can also opt for differing levels of flexibility in the partitions: a) For day-to-day flexibility, a school may decide to design
classrooms through the choice of the movable walls or
some of its classrooms to have foldable walls which can lecture style teaching for certain subjects/classes; or to
Day to day flexibility using movable partitions
be opened to form a big lecture room to enable larger partition a standard classroom into smaller rooms to cater to smaller groups of students with different learning abilities. However, there will be some trade-offs in installing foldable walls for this flexibility (compared cost, durability and noise insulation. b) Another possibility is to use mobile partition screens within the classroom space. The screens can be moved around to form enclosures for small group discussions, for independent learning. c) or to isolate students who need to take private tests; or
with the traditional brick wall classrooms) in terms of
For medium term (e.g. year-to-year) flexibility, schools can make use of dry wall partitions (gypsum board) instead of solid walls. and allow the When the need arises, these spaces to be quickly
Medium term flexibility using dry wall partitions
partitions can be removed without too much difficulty reconfigured. See Appendix 1 for examples of some classroom
flexible classroom configurations.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.2-2
DESIGN CONCEPTS
2.3
Under FlexSI, certain school facilities can be used for multiple currently make use of special teaching areas or rooms which are multiple usages.
purposes other than its intended function. Some schools relatively less utilized to make them adaptable for alternative or
Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages
2.4
Schools wanting to use a facility for multiple functions can consider the use of flexible mechanisms with features such as folding, sliding, tilting and rotating to enhance the facilitys flexibility in space, lighting, display and storage capabilities. Furniture and equipment that can be stacked, modified or wheeled can also be incorporated so that the room can be used for multiple functions such as training, projects, quizzes and competitions. One possibility is to have mobile canteen tables so that they can be folded and wheeled away, making the Appendix 2 for examples. canteen space available for group or other activities. See
Flexible Mechanisms
2.5
Detachable plug and play components such as internet ready IT equipment supplemented by acoustic paneling can also be brought in to enhance infrastructural flexibility for adaptable usage.
Furniture & Equipment (F&E)
For instance, the Music Room or AV Room could be
designed so that it could be converted into a recording studio
when the need arises for the school to produce AV recordings. Alternatively, the Music and AV Rooms could be located next to each other with a flexible partition between them, to enable such as dance or drama practices. 2.6 both the areas to be combined into a larger area for activities
The effective mode of learning differs from child to child. Facilities
or spaces can be configured to meet the needs of the relevant modes, whether interactive, experiential, independent or hands-on learning. Spaces outside classrooms can especially be exploited as potential learning spaces. For e.g. outdoor gardens, classroom
Designing External Areas as Learning Spaces
corridors and foyers can be designed to integrate teaching and learning functions. Such spaces generate exciting and varied Appendix 3 for examples. physical experiences to ignite the students learning passions. See
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.3-1
The FlexSI FRAMEWORK
3.0 3.1
The FlexSI Framework The FlexSI framework is represented diagrammatically as follows:Table 1:
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.3-2
3.2
The FlexSI framework is translated into the following Design Guideline. The guideline lays down the guiding principles, caps infrastructural provisions for schools. and funding, roles and responsibilities and stipulates the major
3.3
In deciding on the design for FlexSI, schools should be guided by the following principles: a)
Guiding Principles
Spirit of Learning the purpose is to promote learning
b) Safety - user safety must not be compromised at all times
c)
Sustainability
plan
for
sustainability
and
maintainability of the facilities over the longer term d) Stewardship - exercise proper stewardship over the management of infrastructure resources to minimize wastages and maximize usage 3.4
Under the guideline, there are overall caps placed on the use of budget, the built-up area (both Nett Floor Area and Gross Floor Area) and the schools design provisions as follows:
Caps on FlexSI provisions
3.5
Schools that are undergoing PRIME can capitalize on the budget for upgrading to re-think their learning needs and build the school that can best support their vision for learning.
Caps on Funding
3.6
The remaining schools which have already undergone PRIME and/or will not be undergoing PRIME will be able to leverage on School, it will be provided 95% of the amount. the FlexSI Fund. If an Aided school is selected as a FlexSI Pilot
3.7
Independent Schools currently have full flexibility in deciding on their facilities, and may already be provided with a wide range of facilities including lecture theatres and tutorial rooms. Hence, the FlexSI framework will only serve as a guide to Independent their infrastructure more flexible. provided.
Schools, and provide them with more ideas on how they can make No extra funding will be
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.3-3
3.8
In terms of areas, caps are placed on the total Nett Floor Area (NFA) per school. In primary and secondary schools, the total NFAs not to be exceeded are 8878 m2 and 11682.5 m2 respectively.
Caps on Areas
3.9
Within the given NFA, limits are set on grouped areas such as the
School White Area (SWA) and FAVE space. Proposals for SWA shall not exceed 15% of the total NFA while proposals for FAVE space shall be within 890 m2 for primary school, and 1110 m2 for secondary school (taken from 10% of the standard circulation area).
3.10
IT proposals, e.g. requests for additional IT points and equipment, are already made available under the existing IT grant.
are to be catered for outside of the FlexSI design package as these
Caps on Other Provisions
3.11
FlexSI proposals that would result in significant recurrent costs are to be carefully considered and schools have to ensure their sustainability within their existing recurrent votes. E.g. the provision of air-conditioning to facilities to make them possible for multiple usages would incur substantial running costs.
3.12
Designs under the FlexSI concept must not be ostentatious and any aesthetic embellishments to the intended proposal must be excluded.
3.13
Containers or any other forms of temporary structures are not allowed to be used in the implementation of FlexSI.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.3-4
3.14
The FlexSI guideline seeks to bring the relevant parties into design collaboration at the beginning stages of planning a new school so school leaders, the design consultant it is and the Ministrys to have the inputs can be captured and taken into the design process. The representative each have a part to play in contributing to the ideation levels. process. For schools, important
Roles
representation from the different subject specialisation and user bring added value to the process. 3.9 Inputs from the various stakeholders of the school can
Schools will be engaged in the relevant thinking processes leading
to the formulation of the Needs Identification with the help of the design consultant. During the engagement sessions, schools should freely express their needs and visions in terms of the pedagogical approaches, operational needs, educational strategies and finally, their perceived implications on the physical infrastructure. The consultant will consolidate these needs, culture, to arrive at the Schedule of Accommodation and the proposed school design.
Responsibilities
including considerations like the schools profile, identity and
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.4-1
FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS
4.0
FlexSI Design Provisions The design provisions details the various facilities to be provided under FlexSI and what the school can decide on in the design of their schools. It consists of 4 main groups as listed below: a) b) c) Group 1 - Essential Area Group 2 - School White Area (SWA) Group 3 - FAVE Space (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile) d) Group 4 - Others
4.1
The Essential Area lists the basic essential facilities that the school
must have to fulfil its basic instructional capabilities. The facilities are provided to address basic teaching and learning pedagogical requirements. It places minimum limits on the size and number of units of each facility.
Essential Area (Group 1)
4.2
The Essential Area is grouped into 2 sub categories, namely the Fixed Specifications and the Flexible Specifications: a)
non-negotiable i.e. must be finished according to the minimum specifications provided e.g.
Fixed Specification consists of provisions which are the
Fixed Specification
administrative facilities such as the general office, staff rooms and some rooms for the specialised subjects. b)
Flexible Specification consists of areas which the school has the flexibility in deciding on number, configuration or size. learning spaces. and interior This allows a school greater
Flexible Specification
flexibility in mixing and matching the different Note that the school must still of the facility e.g. the
conform to the minimum number, type, modular size classrooms and ancillary areas such as the Hall, Canteen and Library. provisions
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FLEXSI
2.4-2
FlexSI DESIGN PROVISIONS
4.3
The School White Area is an existing concept which gives the school autonomy to design or modify certain areas within the as SWA (about 15% of the total nett floor area) into new facilities to school. The school can choose to convert those areas designated cater to the schools special programmes and niche areas. It can change the existing function, area, finishes and internal provision of the facilities to create new facilities.
School White Area (Group 2)
4.4
Under FlexSI, the SWA concept, funding and approval authority will remain unchanged. Please refer to the tables on School White Area Component in Appendix 5 and Appendix 6 for the details and recommendations on SWA facilities and provisions.
4.5
The FAVE concept makes use of excess areas that can be aggregated to become useful spaces, and which can remain flexible and available for future expansion needs that the school might not yet envisage. FAVE Spaces can be identified from the schools circulation areas.
FAVE Space (Group 3)
4.6
There is no set limit on the type of spaces that can be annexed for the selected function. Meanwhile, the space can be used as we estimate that up to a maximum of 10% of the total of FAVE space is found in Appendix 4.
FAVE area usage so long as the space fits the design objective of informal learning areas cum circulation space. Under this concept, circulation/service areas may become FAVE space. An illustration
4.7
The Others category provide for mainly external works such as the play courts, field and parade square. These facilities have to be provided as specified. If modifications to these facilities are specialist in MOE for consideration. required, schools can submit the proposals to the relevant
Others (Group 4)
4.8
The Facilities Tables for Primary Schools and Secondary Schools
sum up the infrastructural provision to be provided under FlexSI in terms of facility type, number of units, and unit area. These can be found in Appendix 7 and Appendix 8 respectively.
Facilities Tables for Primary and Secondary Schools
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 Design Considerations
3.1
Introduction 3.2
Site Planning 3.3
Safety & Security / Emergency Planning 3.4
Vision Care
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.1-1
INTRODUCTION
1.0 1.1
Introduction This section serves to highlight the important considerations to be followed in school design. They include: Site Planning Safety & Security / Emergency Planning Vision Care
School Design Criteria
1.2
During the design process, there would be other considerations which schools could review and which consultants could render their expertise on. These include: Ergonomic design Maintainability Weather protection
1.3
These considerations apply to the design of the physical and spatial layout, roof, facade, building elements, finishes, internal provisions and fitment and furniture.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.2-1
SITE PLANNING
2.0
Introduction In every building design, the surrounding environment has significant impact on the quality of school facilities provided. There are influence the micro environment of the school. many factors that can favourably or adversely
2.1
2.2
Special design features in the building may be able to reduce, if not therefore an important aspect to be addressed at the onset of school development. eliminate, the unfavourable effects. Site suitability is
2.3
In order to achieve quality design, consideration must be given to the planning criteria outlined by the following site factors: Site Area Site Configuration and Terrain Site Orientation Setback Requirements Zoning and Facilities Layout
Site factors to be considered
2.4
The following describes the afore-mentioned site factors. The elaboration in terms of particular dimensions and technical pointers can be referred to in Vol. 4 - Chapter 1 (Architectural) of the School Design Handbook.
2.5
Site Area At the inception of design, the area of the site has to be carefully examined by the architect in terms of feasibility for school development. The site area should be fairly level without excessive embankment and be free from drainage, sewerage or road reserve and service lines. should be allowed for. inevitable but within acceptable limits, a slightly bigger site area Where site encumbrances are
from encumbrances
Site area to be free
2.6
Site Configuration Sites of irregular shapes are not ideal for effective utilization of land. They often result in pockets of unusable land. as much as possible. scarce Singapore, it is necessary to optimise the usage of land In land
Site to be regular in shape and well optimised
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
CONSIDERATIONS
DESIGN
3.2-2
SITE PLANNING
2.7
Site Orientation The site configuration with respect to its orientation is
important. A site with good orientation enables the buildings, particularly the classroom block(s), to be located in the correct orientation, i.e. with the longer facade facing the North-South direction. This is to minimise the penetration of sunlight and thus solar heat into the building. Deviations from the desired orientation should be addressed in the building design.
Minimise the penetration of sunlight
2.8
Setback & Spacing Requirements When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances from the site boundary and clearances between blocks have to be observed. This is to provide the school with buffers against noise and distractions (from adjacent traffic or from neighbouring facilities). As the school building is largely naturally-ventilated, these setbacks help to create good cross ventilation within the site.
2.9
Zoning & Facilities Layout The placement of certain types of facilities in relation to other
types and the proximity between them usually take into account the functions and operational requirements of those facilities. They affect the spatial flow within the school and influence the conduct of the activities. For e.g. the Canteen placed next to the Parade Square of Field enables the smooth spillover of mass providing a safe and more comfortable accommodation for the students. Schools have areas that need to be secured and accesses to certain facilities need to be restricted. These are largely considerations on zoning include emergency planning. dictated by the facilities layout plan within the school. Other activity between facilities, minimizing bottle-neck situations and
Facilities Layout to accommodate smooth operations and mass activity
Zoning to achieve safety and security
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.3-1
SAFETY & SECURITY
3.0 3.1
Safety & Security Every school must provide a safe environment for its students, staff and property. Safety or the physical wellbeing of staff and students must be prioritized over other issues in the design of the building spaces, elements and services. finishes, in fitment and furniture, as well as building
3.2
The following highlight the safety pointers for Consultants to emergency planning provisions in a school. note, in terms of architectural, engineering and
3.3
The design of spaces within the building must take into account the size of the student population and the
Mass Accommodation
possibility of their mass movement. When students move in masses, wider corridors and even level flooring are to be same floor, ramps are preferred. 3.4 provided. Where differing levels occur between spaces on the
It is important to note the profile of students in terms of they normally engage in so as to provide the appropriate and fitment.
their physical attributes, tendencies and the kinds of activity scale and design for all areas of building including furniture
Student Profile
3.5
The implications of wet weather climate on student safety need to be addressed as our school buildings are largely open to the elements and are mostly naturally-ventilated.
Climatic implications
3.6
Traffic, both vehicular and pedestrian, must be given due consideration and properly organized to ensure student safety at all times.
Pedestrian and vehicular traffic
3.7
Care and precautionary steps need to be exercised in the installations ceilings, M & E services, weather protection devices, so that they do not pose as safety hazards to the students and staff. of various building components such as
Installations of building components
3.8
As schools house a large quantity of assets, including IT equipment and confidential materials, they need to be wellsecured within the right places and by the appropriate means.
Security provisions
REV 00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.3-2
SAFETY & SECURITY
3.9
Certain facilities and areas within the school are out of bounds to students and unauthorized staff. Access to these facilities need to be strictly controlled by use of secure locking mechanisms, key systems or security alarm systems.
Controlled Accesses
3.10
Thermal comfort and Environmental Health are extended areas of safety that affect the well-being of students and staff. Spaces and facilities ought to be designed to ensure good Requirements relating to good hygiene need to be given due consideration at food preparation areas, refreshment areas and toilets within the school. cross ventilation and acceptable air qualities.
Thermal Comfort Environmental Health and
3.11
In time of emergency, the school must be wellprepared to
direct and guide its students and staff to areas of safety or to accommodate them in protected facilities within the school. Holding areas must be identified and equipped with Public Address (PA) Systems.
Emergency Planning
3.12
The particular specifications and technical details on all the Vol.4.
above requirements can be referred to in Chapters 1 & 2 of
REV 00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.4-1
VISION CARE
4.0 4.1
Vision Care Vision care is an important design consideration in the planning of every facility. Schools can take the effort to promote good eye care habits among students while ensuring students vision. the school environment is well-catered for the care of its
Objective of Vision Care in Facility Planning
4.2
From the technical viewpoint, the desired vision care objective is to provide for a comfortable level of lighting for the various purposes that may be required during teaching and learning.
At the same time, it is to moderate the intensity of direct light coming from light sources and to minimize the glare that may be reflected off the working surfaces. 4.3
Facilities should hence be designed to take into account the
full range of lighting needs of the activities conducted within them. The environmental impact of light on the facility, e.g. sunshades, as well as the vision care implications on these objectives. the amount of daylight, the solar orientation and the design of activities, must also be evaluated in order to achieve the
Implications on Vision Care
4.4
There are some possible technical pointers that could affect the vision care requirement of school facilities. These include: Layout of facility in relation to the solar orientation Number and size of window openings Arrangement of students seats and work tables in relation to source of light and teaching surfaces e.g. whiteboard, projection screen Placement of whiteboard / projection screen in
relation to the source of light
Students viewing angles to the teaching surfaces Type of material for whiteboard surface Size of text used on whiteboard and projection screen Type and number of lightings provided Choice of room colour
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
3.4-2
VISION CARE
4.5
The guidelines on how to address vision care in facility design Design Handbook. Some of them are highlighted below:
can be referred to in Vol. 4, Chapters 1 & 2 of the School
Guidelines on Vision Care
4.6
Non-air-conditioned rooms shall be orientated with their that the whiteboard receives minimum glare from
windows facing the North-South direction. This is to ensure incoming sunlight. the
North-South Orientation
4.7
Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the exterior.
4.8
The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface.
not have windows or openings that would allow light to
Minimize Glare on Whiteboard surface
REV-00 / FEB 06
4 Appendices
4.1
Possible Classroom Configurations 4.2
Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages 4.3 External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces 4.4
Illustration of FAVE Space 4.5
School White Area (SWA) 4.6
Recommendations on Facilities and Finishes for School White Area 4.7
Primary School Facilities Table 4.8
Secondary School Facilities Table 4.9
Space Norms
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.1-1
CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS
APPENDIX 1. EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS

1 Day to Day (Immediate) Flexibility Full height operable partitions can be used to reconfigure a space within a short time span of perhaps 10 to 15 minutes. Additionally, mobile furniture and equipment (F & E) which can be easily shifted within a facility as well as from room to room can be used. Thus both teachers and students will be able to quickly configure a space to suit their requirements. 2 Medium Term Flexibility Compared to solid walls, dry wall partitions will take a shorter time to remove (about 3 days) when a reconfiguration of space is required. 3 Sample Configuration 1:
Sliding Folding Partition
Lecture style teaching can be conducted when partition is opened
Dry wall partition reconfigured into resource areas
3.1
In this illustration, both degrees of flexibility have been incorporated: The sliding folding partition allows 2 classrooms to be combined into 1 large teaching on a day-to-day need basis, simply by opening the sliding folding partition in between. On the other hand, for the purpose of medium term flexibility, for e.g. when classroom. The enlarged classroom space can be used for lecture-style
physical niches are needed to accommodate resource corners within the classroom, the drywall partition in between can be easily removed and reconfigured.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.1-2
CLASSROOM CONFIGURATIONS
Sample Configuration 2:
Instructional style teaching being conducted
Mobile partition acts as visual screen
Small Group discussion
4.1
In this illustration, we can see that the enlarged classroom allows the teacher to explore different pedagogical styles. The teacher in this case, is formally teaching a set of students while at the same time monitoring another set of students seated in small discussion groups. folding partition and the mobile screen aid to minimize visual distractions for students involved in the small group discussions. The partially closed sliding
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.2-1
FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE
ADAPTABLE USAGES
APPENDIX 2. EXAMPLES OF FACILITIES WITH MULTIPLE ADAPTABLE USAGES
The photo on the left shows an example of an Indoor Sports Hall with retractable tiered seating neatly flushed against the wall when seating is not required, thus clearing the space seating of an audience, the tiered seating is pulled out. This flexibility allows the Hall to be utilized for multiple functions. for other activities. However, as shown in the photo on the right, when there is need for
A school can opt to divide Canteen space into several Canteen areas distributed
throughout the school. For example, the school can have a smaller Canteen and another caf-style eating area near the library. Alternatively, the school can transform some of its smaller yet open common spaces into the snack bars. These satellite eating spaces provide venues for student interaction and can be used as learning areas outside their
classrooms. When required for other purposes, the chairs and tables can be moved aside.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.3-1
EXTERNAL AREAS AS LEARNING SPACES
APPENDIX 3. EXAMPLES OF EXTERNAL AREAS DESIGNED AS LEARNING SPACES
This is an example of an outdoor amphitheatre. It can be used for performing arts events as well as for informal group briefings.
The above picture shows a corridor outside the Mother Tongue Language
Room which has been modified into a display gallery showcasing the Malay Culture. The corridor can be used for other forms of display and become a highly interactive space for learning.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.4-1
FAVE AREAS
APPENDIX 4. ILLUSTRATION OF FAVE (Flexible, Adaptable and VErsatile) SPACE
Before Expansion Corridor
Staircase
Study Corner
FAVE space
Room Space
Room Space
After Expansion Corridor
Staircase
Study Corner
optimized
Room Space enlarged
As part of the school design, FAVE space can be carved out of the circulation areas to serve as informal learning spaces. When a room needs to be enlarged for a larger class size, for example, the FAVE space can then be aggregated together with the existing space within the room.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.5-1
SCHOOL WHITE AREA
APPENDIX 5: OVERVIEW
1.1 School White Area (SWA) is a planning concept that allows schools undergoing development greater flexibility in deciding the facilities requirement for the schools special programmes and niche areas. 1.2 The more common SWA facilities requested by schools are for
various functions including Multi-purpose use, Sports, Performing Arts, Archive and Heritage display, Dance and Music. On the other rooms and the Mother Tongue Language rooms. A complete list is shown in Appendices 6. hand, the commonly replaced basic facilities include the CCA
Commonly requested facilities
1.3
Under the SWA concept, 15% to 20% of the standard school nett floor area can be utilised to change the existing standard facilities, or to create new ones that are not found within schools standard replacement cost method.
provision. The funds for these facilities would be arranged by the
1.4
The school submitting proposals for their change request would have to obtain approval through MOE.
Approval process
1.5
Finishes and interior provisions for SWA facilities could be proposed This is to encourage creativity and innovation. Schools can also refer to a list of recommended finishing for the different facilities as shown in Appendix 6.
by the school, for the architects evaluation and MOEs approval.
Recommended finishes
1.6
The overall costs of both basic areas and SWA must be within the project budget. If there is cost overrun due to new facilities under the SWA, schools will be asked to fund the extra costs.
Planning criteria for SWA
1.7
Schools proposal for SWA request must be: in line with educational needs, whether they pertain to teaching or ancillary facilities that support the schools ability-driven programmes and niches. project cost within the total nett floor area (NFA) of standard facilities and within the approved caps on maintenance and running costs for standard facilities put to use for a minimum period proposal time to take effect of 5 years in order to give the
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.5-2
SCHOOL WHITE AREA
1.8
The following facilities are not allowed: Running tracks and swimming pools - these would require more land area and are costly to build and maintain Covered car-parks Air-conditioning of classrooms Facilities which are ostentatious or opulent in nature Increase in administrative and personnel areas that are in contradiction to Inter-Ministry guidelines
Facilities that are not allowed
1.9
For the external areas, the current provision of a Field, a Basketball Court and Netball cum Volleyball Court must be retained, as advised by the Educational Programmes Division.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.6-1
RECOMMENDED SWA FACILITIES
APPENDIX 6A.
SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN PRIMARY SCHOOL Basic Facilities Facility Unit (No) 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total Area (m 2 ) 0 0 90 0 90 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 White Area Facilities Unit (No) 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 135 90 90 180 90 90 90 65 24 65 65 195 40 65 Total Area (m 2 )
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Mother Tongue Language Room Mathematics Room Art & Crafts Room Audio Visual Room (A/C) Music Room (A/C) Science Room IT Learning Resource Room (A/C) Meeting Room (A/C) Counselling Room Furniture Store Games Equipment Store CCA Room Pastoral Care Room Health & Fitness Room
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.6-2
RECOMMENDED SWA FACILITIES
APPENDIX 6B.
SCHOOL WHITE AREA FACILITIES IN SECONDARY SCHOOL Basic Facilities Facility (No) 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Unit Total Area (m 2 ) 0 0 0 0 135 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 225 White Area Facilities (No) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1 Unit Total Area (m 2 ) 135 90 22.5 135 135 45 22.5 135 45 180 115 200 20 25 24 40 65 72 72 96 72 48 208 20 2022
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Mother Tongue Language Room Humanities Room Humanities Workroom Commerce Room Art & Crafts Room Project Room Casting Room Audio Visual Room (A/C) AV Store IT Learning Resource Room (A/C) Needlework Room Design Room Design Room Store Prefects Room Counselling Room Career Guidance Room Meeting Room (A/C) Furniture Store Games Equipment Store CCA Room Health & Fitness Room NCC/NPCC Room Rifle Range Armoury Total Nett Floor Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
1
ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.6-3
APPENDIX 6C. RECOMMENDED FINISHING FOR SWA FACILITIES
RECOMMENDED FINISHES FOR SWA FACILITIES
FACILITY/ROOM Art Gallery Multi-Purpose Room Band Room Dance Studio Music Room Archives Room Heritage Centre Career Resource Room
DESCRIPTION OF USAGE To display students' art works and art pieces For group function, rehearsals, small performances etc. For band, Chinese orchestra and dance practices For practical and theory dance lessons For practical and theory music lessons; shared between band and choir Storage of school's heritage items Display of school's heritage items Stores informative charts, reference documents, software and communication tools on career development; for interviews, consultations on career resource
FLOOR Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Timber Strip Flooring Timber Sport Floor Timber Strip Flooring Homogeneous Ceramic Tiles Homogeneous Ceramic Tiles Cement screed
WALL/ PARTITION Emulsion paint Acoustic Panels Acoustic Panels Full-height mirrored Wall on 3 sides and acoustic wall panels Full-height mirrored Wall on 1 side and acoustic wall panels Emulsion paint Emulsion paint Emulsion paint
CEILING Emulsion paint Suspended Ceiling Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Emulsion paint Suspended
MAGNETIC Nil Yes Nil Yes Yes Nil Nil Yes
WHITEBOARD
PIN-UP Nil Yes Yes Yes Yes Nil Nil Yes
BOARD
PROJECTION SCREEN Nil Yes Yes Yes Yes Nil Nil Yes
MASTERKEY GROUPINGS Nil Master key Master key Master key Master key Masterkey Master key Master key
SECURITY High Medium High Medium Medium High High Medium
OTHERS Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17.1
Creativity Room Centre of Learning
For multi-purpose usage and CCA; enrichment programmes as well as teaching of mother tongue language Teaching of Chinese language, literature, conducting group activity etc. For project work & students' extra school hour activities Used for CCA group activities and meetings For Guzheng music practices For working out on fitness equipment For testing robotics experiments; includes "playfield" in centre of room that calls for change in standard LAN pt layout For student recreational activities For performances/ seminar/ lectures/ training For conducting school performances, ceremonies For lectures / seminars
Cement screed Vinyl Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Timber Strip Flooring Vinyl Sports Flooring Vinyl Vinyl Carpet Tiles Acoustic Vinyl T&G timber strips/board (inlcuding stage steps) Acoustic vinyl for lecture-style platform Vinyl Non-slip homogeneous ceramic tiles Non-slip homogeneous ceramic
Emulsion paint Emulsion paint Emulsion paint Emulsion paint Acoustic Panel Wall Emulsion paint and mirror for one wall Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint Acoustic timber / fabric panelling Acoustic timber panelling Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint Wall tiles up to 2.2m high only Wall tiles up to 2.2m high only Emulsion Paint
Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Emulsion paint Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Emulsion paint Suspended ceiling Suspended ceiling Emulsion paint Suspended ceiling Emulsion Paint Suspended ceiling Emulsion paint Suspended ceiling
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Yes Nil Nil
Yes Yes Nil Yes Yes Nil Yes Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Yes Yes Nil Nil
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Yes Yes Nil Nil Nil Nil
Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Master key Nil Nil Master key Key Alike Key Alike Master key
Medium High Medium Medium High High Medium Medium Medium Medium Nil Nil High Medium Medium Medium
Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Fixed Theatre Seats Seats with flipup writing tops Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
(Chinese Studies) Room
Cooperative Learning CCA Room Guzheng Ensemble Room Health & Fitness
Room
Robotics Laboratory/ Inotech Room Youth Hub Auditorium Seating Area
17.2
Stage
For conducting school performances, ceremonies For lectures / seminars
17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6
Control Room Changing Rooms Toilet Reception (Lobby) for 400-seats only
For housing and operating sound and video equipment For changing in between performances, housing of props etc. Sanitary uses For performance auditorium, a holding area for guests before programme starts, for reception, refreshments
tiles
auditorium with above
Carpet Tiles
For lecture theatre, as a receiving /registration area only For storing furniture and props For storing PSLE question papers and confidential documents before and after the examinations.
Homogenous Ceramic Tiles Cement screed Homogenous Ceramic Tiles
Emulsion paint Emulsion Paint Emulsion paint
Emulsion paint Emulsion Paint Emulsion paint
Nil Nil Nil
Yes Nil Nil
Nil Nil Nil
Nil Key Alike Nil
Nil Nil High
Nil Nil Smoke Detector
17.7 18
Store Room Strong Room
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.7-1
FACILITIES TABLE
PRIMARY SCHOOL
APPENDIX 7.
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1)
FIXED SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS UNIT AREA (m2) REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
FLEXIBLE
GENERAL TEACHING 1 CLASSROOM (1 CLASSROOM TO BE DESIGNATED AS LEARNING SUPPORT COORDINATORS ROOM) Min. 42 Min. 45 To provide for maximum capacity of 1440 students per session. When required, built area must be able to revert to 42 units of 90m2. (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) SPECIAL TEACHING 1 2 3 4 5 ART & CRAFTS ROOM MUSIC ROOM (A/C) MUSIC STORE SCIENCE ROOM COMPUTER ROOM (A/C) (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) ADMINISTRATIVE/STAFF 1 2 PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C) VICE-PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C) ADMINISTRATION MANAGER 3 4 5 6 7 8 (A/C) 3 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 8 per staff Min. 54 Min. 20 Min. 20 Min. 20 103 To provide for 10 staff and HOD. 9 STAFF ROOM (A/C) Min. 1 10 11 STAFF LOUNGE (A/C) STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) Min. 1 Min. 1 880 Min. 65 Min. 40 -Nil502 workstation area of 8 m2 per -NilCan explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM for individual staff. guidelines on space provisions OPERATION MANAGER (A/C) GENERAL OFFICE (A/C) OFFICE STORE PRINTING ROOM (A/C) SICK BAY H.O.Ds OFFICE (A/C) 1 1 per VP 20 12 per VP Must adhere to existing IM for individual staff. guidelines on space provisions Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 3 720 Min. 135 Min. 45 Min. 90 -NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages. Min. 90 Min. 90 3780 School to decide on the number of units, size (in modular increments of 45 m2) and configuration, depending on its needs.
To provide for 94 staff and staff. workstation area of 4 m2 per
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.7-2
FACILITIES TABLE
PRIMARY SCHOOL
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) CONT

FIXED SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS UNIT AREA (m2) REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
FLEXIBLE
ANCILLARY 1 2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C) MULTI-PURPOSE HALL STAGE AREA SEATING AREA Min. 1 1 1 1 Min. 368 1070 Min. 30 Min. 910 To provide Librarian Workroom and Instructional Area. Halls seating area to provide capacity for maximum enrolment and staff. A full performance stage has to be provided in the school. If this Can explore provisions for multiple usages. If the Stage and Seating areas total less than 1070 m2, the excess area can be recombined with other facilities e.g. AV Room to include the full performance stage.
is not provided in the Hall, the Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage. 3 CANTEEN Min. 1 Min. 700 Total Canteen areas to provide for maximum student recess periods. enrolment per session over 2
School can decide on different area must not be less than 700m2. Can explore provisions for multiple usages. areas. Can be combined with FAVE
canteen type but total minimum
4 5 6
BOOK SHOP DENTAL CLINIC (A/C) NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) TOTAL ESSENTIAL AREA
Min. 1 1 1
Min. 12 42 10 2214 7594 -Nil-
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
Can explore provisions for multiple usages.
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.7-3
FACILITIES TABLE
PRIMARY SCHOOL
SCHOOL WHITE AREA (GROUP 2)

FLEXIBLE SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS UNIT AREA (m2) 45 TOTAL AREA (m2) 135 REMARKS
GENERAL TEACHING 1 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM 3 facilities. This facility can be converted into other
SPECIAL TEACHING 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 MATHEMATICS ROOM ART & CRAFTS ROOM / ART STORE AUDIO VISUAL ROOM (A/C) MUSIC ROOM (A/C) SCIENCE ROOM IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) COUNSELLING ROOM MEETING ROOM (A/C) CCA ROOM PASTORAL CARE ROOM HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM FURNITURE STORE GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE TOTAL SCHOOL WHITE AREA 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 90 90 90 90 90 90 24 65 65 40 65 65 65 90 90 180 90 90 90 24 65 195 40 65 65 65 1284 These facilities can be converted into other These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas. These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas.
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF AREAS
ANCILLARY
facilities to support the schools niche areas.
TOTAL NFA * INCLUDING : ESSENTIAL AREA, SCHOOL WHITE AREA * The total NFA of the school must not exceed 8878m2
8878m2
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.7-4
FACILITIES TABLE
PRIMARY SCHOOL
FAVE AREA (GROUP 3)

TYPE OF SPACE 1 2 CIRCULATION SPACE SERVICES AREAS TOTAL FAVE AREA (M2)
FIXED SPECIFICATION
schools circulation space can be carved from. 890 Approximately 890m2 (10%) of the
To cater for future expansion of facilities while currently serving as informal learning spaces.
OTHER AREA (GROUP 4)

FIXED SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS 23 4 6 1 1 1 1 1 DIMENSIONS (m) TOTAL AREA (m2) 265 190 14.4 608 544 3200 1200 120 In general, these facilities have to be provided as stated. Schools will be required to justify all deviations. REMARKS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STAFF & VISITORS CAR PARK LOTS BUS LOTS MOTORCYCLE LOTS BASKETBALL COURT NETBALL-CUM-VOLLEYBALL COURT PLAYFIELD PARADE SQUARE OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA
4.8 x 2.4 13.2 X 3.6 2.4 X 1.0 32.0 X 19.0 32.0 X 17.0 80.0 x 40.0 40.0 x 30.0 30.0 x 4.0
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.8-1
FACILITIES TABLE
SECONDARY SCHOOL
APPENDIX 8.
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1)
FACILITY TYPE
FIXED SPECIFICATION
NO. OF UNITS AREA (m2) UNIT REMARKS
SPECIFICATION
FLEXIBLE
GENERAL TEACHING 1 CLASSROOM Min. 34 Min. 45 To provide for maximum capacity of 1520 students per session. When required, built area must be able to revert to 38 units of 90m2. (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) SPECIAL TEACHING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ART & CRAFTS ROOM ART STORE MUSIC ROOM (A/C) MUSIC STORE IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) COMPUTER ROOM (A/C) SCIENCE LABORATORY LAB PREP ROOM / STORE KITCHEN KITCHEN PREP ROOM / STORE (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 1 DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO 2 WOOD MACHINE SHOP MAIN STORE TOOLS STORE D & T STAFF ROOM (A/C) D & T STUDIO (LS) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Min. 360 Min. 240 Min. 124 Min. 40 Min. 40 24 Min. 300 As required for schools curriculum only. (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) 828 (excluding D & T Studio (LS)) offering lower secondary -NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages. Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 4 Min. 6 Min. 3 Min. 2 Min. 1 2273.5 Min. 125 Min. 42 Min. 50 Min. 135 Min. 144 Min. 90 -NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages. Min. 135 Min. 45 Min. 135 Min. 22.5 3420 School to decide on the number of units, size (in modular increments of 45 m2) and configuration, depending on its needs.
REV-02 / FEB 06
1
1 2
VOL.
SECONDARY SCHOOL
APPENDICES 4.8-2
FACILITIES TABLE
ESSENTIAL AREA (GROUP 1) CONT

FACILITY TYPE
FIXED SPECIFICATION
NO. OF UNITS 1 1 per VP AREA (m2) 20 12 per VP Must adhere to existing IM 8 per staff Min. 54 Min. 20 Min. 20 Min. 20 113 390 Min. 40 Min. 65 -NilTo provide for 11 staff and To provide for 73 staff and workstation area of 4 m2 per staff. guidelines on space provisions for individual staff. UNIT REMARKS
ADMINISTRATIVE/STAFF PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C) VICE-PRINCIPAL'S OFFICE (A/C) ADMINISTRATION MANAGER 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 (A/C) OPERATION MANAGER (A/C) GENERAL OFFICE (A/C) OFFICE STORE PRINTING ROOM (A/C) SICK BAY H.O.Ds OFFICE (A/C) STAFF ROOM (A/C) STAFF LOUNGE (A/C) STAFF RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) ANCILLARY 1 2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY (A/C) MULTI-PURPOSE HALL STAGE AREA SEATING AREA Min. 1 1 1 1 1177 Min. 30 Min. 990 Min. 450 To provide Librarian Workroom and Instructional Area. Halls seating area to provide capacity for maximum enrolment and staff. A full performance stage this is not provided in the Hall, the Hall area shall accommodate a minimum basic stage. 3 CANTEEN Min. 1 Min. 700 Can explore provisions for multiple usages. If the Stage and Seating areas total less than 1070 m2, the excess area can be recombined to include the full performance stage. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 Min. 1 778 workstation area of 8 m2 per HOD. -Nil3
Can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM for individual staff. guidelines on space provisions
has to be provided in the school. If
with other facilities e.g. AV Room
Total Canteen areas to provide for maximum student enrolment per session over 2 recess periods.
School can decide on different canteen type but total minimum area must not be less than 700m2. Can explore provisions for multiple usages. Can be combined with FAVE areas.
4 5 6
BOOK SHOP DENTAL CLINIC (A/C) NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM (RECOMMENDED SUBTOTAL) TOTAL ESSENTIAL AREA
Min. 1 1 1
Min. 12 42 10
-NilTo provide facility as required only. -Nil-
Can explore provisions for multiple usages. -NilCan explore provisions for multiple usages.
2361 (excluding Dental Clinic) 9660.5
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.8-3
FACILITIES TABLE
SECONDARY SCHOOL
SCHOOL WHITE AREA (GROUP 2)

FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS UNIT AREA (m2) 45 TOTAL AREA (m2) 135 REMARKS
GENERAL TEACHING 1 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOM 3 This facility can be converted into other facilities. SPECIAL TEACHING 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 HUMANITIES ROOM HUMANITIES WORKROOM / STORE COMMERCE ROOM ART & CRAFTS ROOM PROJECT ROOM CASTING ROOM AUDIO VISUAL ROOM (A/C) AV STORE IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM (A/C) NEEDLEWORK ROOM DESIGN ROOM DESIGN ROOM STORE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 90 22.5 135 135 45 22.5 135 45 90 115 200 20 90 22.5 135 135 45 22.5 135 45 180 115 200 20 These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas. ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF AREAS 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PREFECTS ROOM COUNSELLING ROOM CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM MEETING ROOM (A/C) CCA ROOM NPCC / NCC ROOM ARMOURY RIFLE RANGE HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM FURNITURE STORE GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE TOTAL SCHOOL WHITE AREA 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 2022 25 24 40 65 24 24 20 208 72 72 72 25 24 40 65 96 48 20 208 72 72 72 These facilities can be These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas. These facilities can be converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
ANCILLARY
converted into other facilities to support the schools niche areas.
TOTAL NFA * INCLUDING : ESSENTIAL AREA, SCHOOL WHITE AREA * The total NFA of the school must not exceed 11682.5m2
11682.5m2
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
SECONDARY SCHOOL
APPENDICES 4.8-4
FACILITIES TABLE
FAVE AREA (GROUP 3)

TYPE OF SPACE 1 2 CIRCULATION SPACE SERVICES AREAS TOTAL FAVE AREA (M2)
FIXED SPECIFICATION
schools circulation space can be carved from. 1110 Approximately 1110m2 (10%) of the
To cater for future expansion of informal learning spaces. facilities while currently serving as
OTHER AREA (GROUP 4)

FIXED SPECIFICATION
FACILITY TYPE NO. OF UNITS 40 4 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 4.8 x 2.4 13.2 X 3.6 2.4 X 1.0 32.0 X 19.0 32.0 X 17.0 AS REQUIRED 100.0 x 66.0 40.0 x 30.0 40.0 x 5.0 6600 1200 200 DIMENSIONS (m) TOTAL AREA (m2) 461 190 14.4 608 544 In general, these facilities have to be provided as stated. Schools will be required to justify all deviations. REMARKS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
STAFF & VISITORS CAR PARK LOTS BUS LOTS MOTORCYCLE LOTS BASKETBALL COURT NETBALL-CUM-VOLLEYBALL COURT LONG JUMP PIT SCHOOL FIELD PARADE SQUARE OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA
REV-02 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.9-1
SPACE NORMS
TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL

1970s Design Site Area (ha) Planned Student Enrolment Nos. of storeys Nos. of Classrooms 1.42 and 1.6 1120 4 28 between 1980s Design 1.8 1990s Design 1.8 between 1050 and 1470 4 36 2000 Design 1.8
1260 4 36
1470 between 4 and 6 42, 36+6, 24
Area of Classrooms (m2) Total NFA (m2) Space Norm per student (m2) by NFA Total GFA (m2)
64 3068 2.74 5522.4
65 5046 4.00 9082.8
between 65 and 90 between 5147 and 8705 between 4.08 and 6.96 between 9264.6 and 15669
90 between 8856 and 8911 between 5.27 and 6.06 approx. 17523 and 17618 between 10.43 and 11.99 2nd Science Rm School White Area Visitors Lounge at General Office
Space Norm per student (m2) by GFA New Facilities
4.93
7.21
between 7.35 and 12.44
Staff Rm MRL ECA Rm
Mathematics Rm Art Store Music Store Computer Rm H.O.Ds Rm Staff Resource Rm Meeting Rm SA and OMs Offices Non-Teaching Staff Rm Counselling Rm Pastoral Care Rm
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.9-2
SPACE NORMS
TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL

1970s Design New Facilities (Continued) 1980s Design 1990s Design Health & Fitness Rm IT Learning Resource Rm LAN Rm Central Server Rm Coaxial Distribution Rm Increase in Facilities Size Classroom 2nd Language Rm Language Lab Art & Crafts Rm AVA Rm Music Rm Science Rm General Office Staff Rm MRL Hall Furniture Store Canteen Games Store Dental Clinic CCA Rm Equipment AVA Rm Music Rm Science Rm General Office Staff Rm H.O.Ds Office MRL Hall Furniture Store Canteen Games Equipment Store Dental Clinic CCA Rm Classroom Mother Tongue Rm Art & Crafts Rm Art & Crafts Rm AVA Rm Music Rm Science Rm Computer Rm Mathematics Rm Music Store General Office AM Office Staff Room 2000 Design
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.9-3
SPACE NORMS
TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL

1970s Design Site Area (ha) Planned Student Enrolment Nos. of Classrooms Area of Classrooms (m2) Total NFA (m2) 7448 between 7959 and 9508 Space Norm per Student (m2) by NFA Total GFA (m2) 13406.4 7.6 between 7.55 and 8.12 between 14326.2 and 17114.4 Space Norm per Student (m2) by GFA New Facilities Art Store Casting Rm Science Prep. Rm Needlework Rm Housecraft Rm Multi Purpose Rm CCA Rm NCC/NPCC Rm Armoury 13.68 between 13.58 and 14.62 Language Laboratory History/Geo. Rm History/Geo. Workrm Audio Visual Store Music Rm Music Store Computer Laboratory Vice-Principals Rm Office Store H.O.Ds Office Staff Lounge Furniture Store between 13.99 and 15.72 Mother Tongue Language Rm IT Learning Resource Rm Commerce Rm SA and OMs Offices Project Rm Counselling Rm Career Guidance Rm Meeting Rm Staff Resource Rm Printing Rm D & T Workshop 2 Technology Store Games Equipment Store Health & Fitness Rm 3.04 980 28 64 1980s Design 2.7 980 between 28 and 36 72 1990s Design 3.0 between 1260 to 1330 between 36 and 38 between 72 and 90 between 9793 and 11619 between 7.77 and 9.04 between 17627.4 and 20914.2 between 11644.5 and 11908 between 8.76 and 8.95 approx. 22358 between 16.81 and 17.15 OM/AMs Office Visitors Lounge at General office 90 2000 Design 3.0 1330 38
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
APPENDICES
4.9-4
SPACE NORMS
TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL

1970s Design New Facilities (Continued) 1980s Design Rm LAN Rms Central Server Rm Coaxial Distribution Rm Increase in Facilities Size Classroom Special Rm Art & Crafts Rm Principals Office Sick Bay Prefects Rm Staff Rm MRL Bookshop Technical Areas Classroom Science Laboratory Kitchen Staff Rm MRL Classroom Music Rm Computer Laboratory Science Laboratory Kitchen Office Store Home Economics Prep. Rm/Store General Office Office Store Printing Rm H.O.Ds Office Staff Rm MRL Hall Furniture Store Canteen CCA Rm Technical Areas Commerce Rm Art & Crafts Rm Music Rm Project Rm Staff Rm 1990s Design Non-Teaching Staff 2000 Design
REV-00 / FEB 06
Master Revision List

Design Handbook Vol. 1 - General
Volume No. Chapter/ Section/ Page No. Revision Series No./ Date Circular No. / Circular Date

EDITION 2006
Vol. 2
Produced by
FOREWORD
> PRIMARY SCHOOL <
Vol. 2
CONTENTS
Introduction
General teaching 1.1 1.2
Classroom
1.3
Learning Support Coordinators Room Mother Tongue Language Room
Special Teaching 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.7
Mathematics Room Art & Crafts Room Audio Visual Room
Music Room & Store Computer Room Science Room
2.6
IT Learning Resource Room
Administrative / Staff 3.1 3.2
Principals Office Vice-Principals Office Office Store General Office
3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.9
H.O.Ds Office
Printing Room
3.8
Counselling Room Staff Room
Meeting Room
3.10 Staff Lounge 3.12 Sick Bay
3.11 Staff Resource Room
REV 00/ FEB 06
Ancillary 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
Media Resource Library Multi-Purpose Hall Furniture Store Canteen Multi-Purpose Hall
(1. Control Room 2. Changing Room 3. Store)
4.5 4.6 4.7
Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room Health & Fitness Room Games Equipment Room
4.8
4.9
4.10 Bookshop
Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room
4.11 Dental Clinic
4.12 Pastoral Care Room
Services & Circulation 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Toilets LAN Room FAVE Area
Central Server Room
External Works 6.1 6.2 6.3
Carpark, Driveway & Porch Play Courts & Parade Square Outdoor Fitness Area Gates & Signwall Guard Post Field, Fence & Footbath
6.4 6.5 6.6
List of Abbreviations Master Revision List Users Reference
REV 00/ FEB 06
Introduction
2
1.0 1.1 Introduction schools facilities. 1 2.0 2.1
VOL.
INTRODUCTION
The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the
Planning Parameters The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario: School operating on a 4:2 session model
Having a max. enrolment of 1440 students (critical session) 2.2 In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated. How to use this Volume Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured. 3.2 The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility.
3.0 3.1
3.3
As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or
other details due to the schools specific programmes, Consultants are required to seek the schools and MOEs advice as to the relevancy of the information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it and the implications, if any, accordingly.
The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary Schools Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1
- Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).
REV-02 / FEB 06
1 General Teaching
1.1
Classroom 1.2
Learning Support Coordinators Room 1.3
Mother Tongue Language Room
2
Critical Information
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
(per school)
1.1-1
CLASSROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 42
When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 42 (90 m2 each).
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
AREA
Min. module of 45 m2 per classroom m2 (42 units)
When required, area must be able to revert to 90
CAPACITY
For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard Pin-up Board As required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Retractable length
2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m
FUNCTION
General Instruction Area Other possible functions include project work, multi-group activity, independent learning
Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Computer Table
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Quiet zone Preferably near the Special Teaching areas
1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m
40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Storage Space for 40
FITMENT/FURNITURE
State Flag
students per session (See Vol. 4 1.2) As required
1 no. to comply with specifications
Students seating to be min. 3m clear from whiteboard Moveable wall partition if installed should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA. State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind
Moveable Wall Partition
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Others Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 1.2) As required Nil
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 1 3.4) Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant Window arrangement and other faade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher) 500 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) 3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher)
Lighting (Lux) Fans
6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil
Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others
1 no. Wall Mounted for teacher
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) DB Closet as required
As required (for Primary Schools only)
REV-01 / FEB 06
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
1.1-2
CLASSROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT (FOR A 90

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. Cabinet
M2
MODULE)
4. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Pin-up Board 6. Students Storage Cabinet Area 7. Computer Tables 8. LCD Projector 9. Printer
POSITION OF STATE FLAG/ MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD AT FRONT WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
1.2-1
LEARNING SUPPORT
COORDINATORS ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1 When required, units must be able to revert to 1 unit of 90m2 each
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
AREA
Min. 45 m2 per module to include: 1. Teachers Corner 2. Interview Area 3. Listening Post
4. Library Corner
5. Group Instructional Area of 90 m2
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/Blinds Whiteboard Pin-up Board As Required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic
When required, area must be able to revert to 1 unit
CAPACITY
1 Staff 10 Students
Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets
1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m at each Specific Area 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable
FUNCTION
General Instruction Area Project work / Individual coaching / Independent learning
10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m
1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st Storey Preferably near to Special Teaching areas Separated from Music Room and Canteen/ Hall
State Flag
Storage Space for 10 students (See Vol. 4 1.2) As Required
Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind 1.5m high partitions to be provided for specific area
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Others Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 1.2) As required
SERVICES
--
Nil
OTHERS
When required, area must be able to revert to 1 x 90 m2 with consideration given to faade elements and proper distribution of mechanical and electrical services. If moveable wall partition is installed, it should have a min. sound insulation of 42 dBA.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) no. for TV) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1 printer)
Lighting (Lux) Fans
500
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) As required DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
1.2-2
LEARNING SUPPORT
COORDINATORS ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 90 M2 MODULE

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. Library Corner 4. Group Instructional Area 5. Listening Post 6. Interview Area 7. Low Cabinet for EP Resources & Students Storage 8. Low Cabinet/ Computer Workstation Area 9. Worktop with High Cabinet 10. LCD Projector 11. Min 1.5m High Partition 12. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 13. Pin-up Board 14. TV 15. Printer
REV-01 / MAY 06
2
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
1.3-1
MOTHER TONGUE
LANGUAGE ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 45 M2 ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
3 nos.
AREA
45 m2 per unit
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition between 2 Rooms Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
Total of 135 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
1 Staff 30 Students
FUNCTION
Teaching of Mother Tongue Languages: Chinese, Tamil & Malay Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Nil 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and with High Cabinet
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Staff Room
Centrally accessible from classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
Retractable
SERVICES
--
10 nos. of Mobile Table (See Vol. 4 1.4)
High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
OTHERS
2 rooms to be interconnected with sliding folding partition (See Vol. 4 1.2) Sliding folding partition to be usable as Pin-up Board
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 5 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 5 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer) 500
Lighting (Lux) Fans
4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
PA System (See Vol.4 2.3) Nil DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
MOTHER TONGUE
1.3-2
LANGUAGE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 3 MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOMS
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector 5. Sliding Folding Partition
REV-00 / FEB 06
2 Special Teaching
2.1
Mathematics Room 2.2
Art & Crafts Room 2.3
Audio Visual Room 2.4
Music Room & Store 2.5
Science Room 2.6
Computer Room 2.7
IT Learning Resource Room
2
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
2.1-1
MATHEMATICS ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM
AREA
90 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
Repository for Mathematics materials and resources Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blackout Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of the rear wall length Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Computer Table Cabinets 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable* 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m 14 nos. 1.6m/0.8 x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 1.4) 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4)
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Should not be on 1st storey Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Nil DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.1-2
MATHEMATICS ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 MATHEMATICS ROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Computer Tables 5. Pin-up Board 6. LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.2-1
ART & CRAFTS ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90M2 ART & CRAFTS ROOM FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 90
m2
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
Floor Wall Ceiling
Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition between 2 Rooms Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1-2 Staff 40 Students
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.2m high x appropriate rear wall length 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable
FUNCTION
Instructional Strategies Mostly activity-based learning strategies involving hands-on experience Storage of Art Materials Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit) If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities
40 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m or (See Vol. 4 1.4)
1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Min. 1 no. Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/bulky projects and for drying pottery/ clay sculptures
Computer Table Cabinets
5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m
Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) (See Vol. 4 1.4)
High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sinks (See Vol. 4 1.4) Supply Cabinet Folio Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Kiln is optional - Safety and ventilation requirements to be ensured where kiln is placed Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items All fitment located outside Art & Crafts Room must be weather-resistant
Kiln
Others
1 no. 8 cubic (Optional, to be confirmed) Soap Dispenser
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES
Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Security Grilles to Drying Terrace
1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
OTHERS
Art Store to be provided and should have visual link with the Art and Crafts Rooms Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a min. 2.5m shelter/ overhang to protect area from rain Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from Art and Crafts Room Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide
Computer Ports Power Points
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
1 no. for printer)
1 no. Single Gang for LCD
Lighting (Lux) Fans
500
1 no. Isolator for Kiln (where kiln is provided)
2 nos. 3m Long Track Lighting
PA System (See Vol.4 2.3) DB Closet as required
2 nos. of Cold Water Supply for each Art Room Isolator to be provided for Exhaust Fans
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.2-2
ART & CRAFTS ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF ART & CRAFTS ROOMS 1 & 2 (90 M2 EACH) AND ART STORE (WITHOUT KILN)
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. Large Format Table Area (14 nos. Trapezoidal Tables) 4. Computer Tables Area 5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 6. 2 nos. of double-sided Mobile Whiteboard 7. Pin-up Board 8. Low Cabinet with Sinks 9. Low Cabinet 10. Worktop with High Cabinets
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF STORE (KILN IS OPTIONAL)
11. Sliding Folding Acoustic Partition 12. LCD Projector 13. Space for Kiln
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.2-3
ART & CRAFTS ROOM
SAMPLE DIAGRAM OF SEATING AREA FOR STILL LIFE LESSONS
PHOTO OF ART & CRAFTS ROOM AS SEEN FROM REAR OF ROOM
PHOTO OF DRYING DECK
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
90
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.3-1
AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
2 nos.
AREA
Total of 180 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Acoustic Treatment Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
For screening of films, slides, OHP transparency filmstrips, television etc. Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Cabinets Blackout Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4)
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Should be on upper storeys
Centrally located with respect to Classrooms and preferably near MRL
FITMENT / FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
Microphone points to be evenly distributed within room
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
OTHERS
The 2 Audio Visual Rooms preferably to be adjacent to each other with sliding folding partition in between Sliding folding partition to be acoustic type
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 1 no. 2 nos. Twin Gang 1 no. Single Gang 500 Nil A/C to be provided with isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Telephone Point Nil 1 no. TV 1 no. LCD
4 nos. microphone points for each room DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.3-2
AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 2 AUDIO VISUAL ROOMS
LEGEND
1. Teachers table 2. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 3. LCD Projector 4. Sliding Folding Acoustic Partition 5. TV
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.4-1
MUSIC ROOM & STORE

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MUSIC ROOM & A 45 M2 MUSIC STORE FINISHES
Floor Wall Timber Strip (Music Room) Concrete Topping (Music Store) Acoustic Treatment (One Music Room to have 2.4m High Full Height Mirror on one side) Emulsion Paint (Music Store) Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Music Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Music Store)
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1 Music Room Min. 1 Music Store
AREA
Min. 90 m2 per Music Room If more than 1 unit is provided, 1 unit of 90 m2 to be School White Area (SWA) Min. 45 m2 per Music Store
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
Instructional Strategies: Mostly activity-based learning strategies involving hands-on experience Storage of musical instruments Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets Others Blackout Blinds 1 no. Magnetic with 1m Manuscript Lines 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m Music Rack & Adjustable Rack Shelves (Store) 1 no. Piano 1 no. AV Table
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from Classroom Areas Preferably interconnected with Music Store Separated from General and other Special Teaching Areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Pin-up Boards to flank Whiteboard Adjustable shelves in rack required 2.4m full-height mirror and 2 grab bars at 840mm and 1050mm from the floor level and 250mm from the wall
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher (Music Room) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel (Music Room) Solid Door (Music Store)
SERVICES
TV to be mounted on wall/ ceiling beside whiteboard, on the side of the AV hardware cabinet
OTHERS
Store door to be min. 1.5m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 5 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD & 1 no. in Music Store) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 300 (Music Store) 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Music Store) A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (Music Room) (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. TV DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.4-2
MUSIC ROOM & STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 2 MUSIC ROOMS (90 M2 EACH) & MUSIC STORE
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. AV Hardware Cabinet 4. Piano 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 6. Full Height Mirror (in one music room only) 7. Music Rack with adjustable shelves 8. LCD Projector 9. TV
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.5-1
SCIENCE ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 TYPE FACILITY FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Glazed ceramic tiles to min. 2.2m Height (except for walls behind High Cabinet in Preparation Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 90 m2 per unit If more than I unit is provided, 1 unit of 90 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Computer Table Cabinets Blackout Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic and 1.2m x 1.2m Sliding Graph Board integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. Worktable with sink 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Tables (See Vol. 4 1.4) 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4) Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet (See Vol. 4- 1.4) Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 1.4) Others 1 no. Refrigerator (in preparation room) 1 no. Soap Dispenser
FUNCTION
Science based subjects and hands-on experiments Storage of teaching aids and lab materials Preparation of class activities Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Worktops to be finished with solid surfacing material with no-drip edge Sink to be polypropylene and vitreous enamel 2 trolleys located in the store/Preparation Room
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
Preparation Room should have visual link to the Science Room Door to Store to be min. 1.2m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 8 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 3 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 1 2.3) 3 nos. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Tap 1 no. TV DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.5-2
SCIENCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 SCIENCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Worktable with sink 2. Students Tables Area 3. Computer Tables Area 4. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Low Cabinet with Sink 6. Worktop with Sink & High Cabinet 7. Low Cabinet 8. Refrigerator 9. LCD Projector 10. TV
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.6-1
COMPUTER ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 135 M2 TYPE FACILITY
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 3 Nos.
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 1.3) Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
AREA
Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom)
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom) 21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Hands-on computer-based learning Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Classrooms
Interconnected with Computer Workroom
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES
1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table 1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teachers table Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
OTHERS
Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom) 1 no. Single Gang for LCD Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil A/C to be provided with isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Telephone Point Nil 1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.6-2
COMPUTER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Computer Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 no.
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
IT LEARNING
2.7-1
RESOURCE ROOM
RECOMMENDED MINIMUM PROVISIONS FOR A 90 M2 MODULE
NO. OF UNITS
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol 4 2.3) Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
1 Staff 42 Students
FUNCTION
Hands-on Computer based Group Learning Group Studies Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets Others 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 1.4) High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4) Nil
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to Room
SERVICES
1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for 2 computer tables
OTHERS
Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type Max. viewing distance from projection screen to last row of students to be 12.5m
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
IT LEARNING
2.7-2
RESOURCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 Administration
Principals Office 3.2 3.1 Meeting Room 3.8 3.7
Vice-Principals Office 3.3
Counselling Room 3.9
General Office 3.4
Staff Room 3.10
Office Store 3.5
Staff Lounge 3.11
Printing Room 3.6
Staff Resource Room 3.12
H.O.Ds Store
Sick Bay
2
VOL.
ADMINISTRATIVE / 3.1-1 STAFF
PRINCIPALS OFFICE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
AREA
20 m2
CAPACITY
1 Principal 5 Visitors
FUNCTION
FITMENT/ FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
Principals work area
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance Interconnected with Vice-Principals Office and General Office Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and HODs Office
Projection Screen
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
Principals Tables Cabinets
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m
1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set
1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe
Built-in safe for Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe Safe to be 850mm above FFL
Others
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is 1 no. Safe (See Critical Information) from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel Burglar Alarm
OTHERS
School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
Others
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 2 nos. Twin Gang Nil 1 no.
500
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Telephone Point
A/C to be provided with Isolator
1 no. Battery Operated Clock
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL
PRINCIPALS OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 20 M2 PRINCIPALS OFFICE
LEGEND
1. Principals Work Area 2. Lounge Area (Sofa Set & Side Tables) 3. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe 4. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 5. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board 7. Magnetic Whiteboard
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF 3.2-1
VICE-PRINCIPALS OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS
1 per VP
FINISHES
AREA
12 m2 per VP
CAPACITY
1 Staff , 2 Visitors
FUNCTION
Vice-principals work area
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Table Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey Accessible through General Office Interconnected with General Office Near Principals Office and H.O.Ds Office
Vice-Principals Cabinets Others
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Nil
1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel Burglar Alarm
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
500
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF VICE-PRINCIPALS OFFICE
LEGEND
1. Vice-Principals Work Area 2. Magnetic Whiteboard 3. Pin-up Board 4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
GENERAL OFFICE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR 78 M2 TYPE FACILITY FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Min. 54 m2 comprising: 1. General Office 2. Administration Managers Workstation (8 m2) 3. Operation Managers Workstation (8 m2) 4. 1 AM/1 OM/2 CSO (Additional 8 m2) 5. Visitors Lounge
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic 5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards
CAPACITY
or
3 Staff + 3 Managers (Administration Manager, AM/Operation Manager, OM) 3 Staff + 2 Managers + 2 Clerical Support Officers (CSO)
Typists Table
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) Reception Counter 1 no. Keyboard Vol. 4 1.4)
FUNCTION
Others
1 no. Key Deposit Box
For school administration
2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See 1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 1.4)
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey with clear unobstructed view of main entrance Easily accessible to public Recommended to be in view of Parade Square Interconnected with Principals Office & Printing Room Away from Canteen
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
General Office
Entrance Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door Closer
SERVICES
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) 1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO) 7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for
OTHERS
Key deposit box must be cylindrical & placed within concrete wall beside entrance to General Office and flushed with wall Entrance door to be tempered glass Adjacent FAVE spaces shall be incorporated to provide for future expansion School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provision for individual staff
3 nos. Single Gang (General Office) 2 nos. Twin Gang (AM) Lighting (Lux) Fan Air-Conditioning Communications 500 Nil 1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)
Scanner & 1 no. for Printer)
PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)
2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM)
Water Supply Others
Nil
Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel Photocopier
Lightning Warning System Console DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
GENERAL OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE

LEGEND
1. AM/OM/CSO Area 2. Typists Tables Area 3. Visitors Lounge 4. Reception Counter 5. High Cabinet 6. Photocopier 7. Printer/Scanner Area 8. 2-Doors Cupboards 9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 10. Magnetic Whiteboard 11. Pin-up Board 12. Fire Alarm Panel 13. PA System 14. Keyboard 15. Key Deposit Box
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
OFFICE STORE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 STORE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint
AREA
Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY
--
Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FUNCTION
Storage of office stationery, equipment and printing
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Nil Nil Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Interconnected with General Office Near Principals & Vice-Principals Offices and Staff Room
Projection Screen
Open Shelves
6 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm System Control Panel (direct feed from Distribution Board) Burglar Alarm
OTHERS
Door to be min. 1.2m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
PRINTING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20M2 ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
AREA
Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Others Blinds Nil Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Projection Screen
Nil
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Windows to face external Door to be min. 1.2m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Nil
Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine, Laminating Machine, Transparency Maker, Photostat Maker, Scanner, Duplicator, Cyclostyling Machine
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 no.
VOL.
H.O.Ds OFFICE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 103M2 OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS AREA

103 sqm comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (8 m2 <+/- 5%> each) 2. Central area for printer, scanner and copier
FINISHES
CAPACITY
10 Staff 20 Visitors (2 visitors per workstation)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board DB Closet Others Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard Nil
FUNCTION
Heads of Departments office
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st floor Interconnected with General Office, Principals & Vice-Principals Offices
Projection Screen
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
10 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 1.4)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance
Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards can be either wall-mounted or free-standing
SERVICES
See Vol. 4 1.4 on requirements for workstation
OTHERS
Main entrance door to H.O.Ds Office to be tempered glass School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 15 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for printer) Nil 12 nos. (including 1 no. for printer)
500
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 2 nos. Telephone Points
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
H.O.Ds OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 103 M2 H.O.Ds OFFICE
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. H.O.Ds Workstations Printer/Scanner Area Magnetic Whiteboard
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 no.
VOL.
MEETING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65M2 MEETING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS AREA

65 m2 Area is School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
CAPACITY
26 Staff including: 16 seated at table and 10 backbenchers
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
FUNCTION
Weekly staff meeting, various committee meetings, external appraisal visits, etc Can be converted into other facilities
Projection Screen Cabinets Others
2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Retractable
LOCATION/ PROXIMITY
Near General Office, Principals & VicePrincipals Offices
18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs
1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang 500 Nil 1 no.
Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others
1 no. LCD
1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
MEETING ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area 2. LCD Projector 3. Low Cabinet 4. Pin-up Board 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 no.
VOL.
COUNSELLING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS FINISHES

Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint
AREA
Emulsion Paint to Soffit of slab
CAPACITY
5 persons
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blinds Nil Nil
Private area to counsel students and parents Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 2nd storey Access from corridor Easily accessible to staff and students There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it Counselling Room should be on the same level as Pastoral Care Room, preferably next to each other
Projection Screen Teachers Table Cabinets Others
1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set
10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Door with Vision Panel
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang 500 Nil 1 no.
3 nos. Single Gang
1 no. Ceiling Mounted
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Tape Recorder
2 nos. Other Electrical Equipment DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
COUNSELLING ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table) 3. Pouffes Area 4. Low Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF
3.9-1
STAFF ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 502 M2 STAFF ROOM
NO. OF UNITS (PER SCHOOL)

Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
502 m2 comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 <+/- 5%> each) 2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers
CAPACITY
94 Staff
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Others Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
FUNCTION
Teaching staff office
Projection Screen
1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room Near General Office, H.O.Ds Office and Office Store
94 nos. Workstation for 42 Classrooms (See Vol. 4 1.4)
78 nos. Workstation for 36 + 6 Classrooms or
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wallmounted
with Door Closer
Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance
SERVICES
The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable See Vol. 4 1.4 on requirements for workstation
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
OTHERS
For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-inCharge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff. Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass
500
DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ADMINISTRATIVE / STAFF
3.9-2
STAFF ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 502 M2 STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Workstations Area 2. Common Printer Area 3. Magnetic Whiteboard 4. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
STAFF LOUNGE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 40 m2
CAPACITY
20 seats
FUNCTION
Relaxation area for staff
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Not higher than 2nd storey Preferable interconnected with Staff Room Near General Office and H.O.Ds Office
Projection Screen
Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 1.4) 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Solid surfacing material countertop to cabinet with sink
2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door
OTHERS
--
Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang Nil
300
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Refrigerator
1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
STAFF LOUNGE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
LEGEND
1. Lounge Sofa Area 2. Journal Rack 3. Low Cabinet with Sink 4. Refrigerator
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 65 m2
CAPACITY
16 Staff
FUNCTION
Repository for shared teaching materials Preparation of teaching materials Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection Screen Teachers Table Cabinets
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Retractable*
Preferably interconnected with Staff Room
Computer Table
4 nos. 0.8m x 0.7m
5 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktop with High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink Sink to have swan neck laboratory tap
Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 1.4)
8 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m Double-Sided Bookshelves 2 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m 2-doors Filing Cabinet
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Burglar Alarm
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 10 nos. Twin Gang 500 Nil 5 nos.
PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) 1 no. Hot/Cold 1 no. Telephone Point
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Teachers Tables Area Book Shelves Area Computer Tables Area 2-door Filing Cabinet Worktop with High Cabinet Low Cabinet with Sink LCD Projector Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
3.12-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY
SICKBAY
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 20 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
2 Students
FUNCTION
Resting
Simple first aid treatment
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Tables Cabinets Others Blinds Nil Nil Nil 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed Towel Rail and Mirror 1 no. Soap Dispenser
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st storey Accessible from General Office for close supervision Preferably interconnected with General Office
FITMENT /FURNITURE
Cater for future air-conditioning Backsplash to be provided for Sink
SERVICES
Power point to be located at table area
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang 300 (Bedhead lights to be provided) 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. 1 no. Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
3.12-2
SICKBAY
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2
SAMPLE LAYOUT 3
ABOVE : SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF 20 M2 SICK BAY
LEGEND
1. Table 2. Folding Single Bed 3. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 4. Sink 5. Dry Wall Partition 6. 2.1m High Curtains
REV-00 / FEB 06
4 Ancillary
4.1 Media Resource Library 4.2 4.7 Health & Fitness Room 4.8
Multi-Purpose Hall 4.3
Games Equipment Room 4.9
Multi-Purpose Hall (Control Room, Changing Room, Store) 4.4
Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room
Furniture Store 4.5
Bookshop 4.11
4.10
Canteen 4.6 Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room
Dental Clinic 4.12 Pastoral Care Room
2
1 no. 1. 2. 3. 4.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.1-1
MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 368M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
NO. OF UNITS AREA
Min. 368 m2 comprising: Reading / Reference Area (RRA) Instructional Area (IA) (80 m2) Librarians Workroom (LW) (25 m2) Circulation Counter (CC)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
120 users seated and standing 2 teacher librarians 10 student librarians 21000 volumes of books
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets Blinds (All Areas) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA) 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at RRA & IA) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA) 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) 3 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA) 2 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (LW) 1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CA) 1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CA) 8 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 1.5m x 0.6m Picture-Book Shelf (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW) (See Vol. 4 for the details of some of the above items.) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CA) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CA) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (RRA) 8 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Open Table (RRA) 2 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (I A) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)
FUNCTION
Reading and Referencing; Group learning Can explore provision for multiple usage
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from noisy area Access preferably on 1st or 2nd storey Away from Music Room and Hall/Canteen Can consider other locations if for alternative usage
FITMENT/FURNITURE
adjustable
All fitment shelves to be removable and
Others
SERVICES
TV point in Reading Reference Area to be located near AV Equipment Worktop
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.1-2

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 368M2 MRL
OTHERS
Minimum 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided Direct access and visual connection to be provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to where necessary Librarians Workroom and Instructional Area Book drop/chute to allow return of books from outside the MRL to be provided be arranged Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to openings perpendicularly to
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports 3 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA) 10 nos. (IA) 2 nos. (LW) Power Points 12 nos. Single Gang (RRA), 6 nos. Single Gang at Counter Area 25 nos. Single Gang (IA) 8 nos. Single Gang (LW) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System at Counter (RRA) PA System (IA and LW) 1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW) Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA) 1 no. LCD (LW)
window
Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to Circulation Counter for easy supervision tempered and sandblasted Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be Half height glass partition for visual access to be provided to Instructional Area and Librarians Workroom All windows to have locks
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.1-3
SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 368M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Circulation Area Book Chute Circulation Counter Area Queue Area Reading/Reference Area 5-piece Sofa Set Raised Platform Trapezoidal Tables Area Open Table Area 15. Librarians Workroom 16. Timber Open Shelves 17. Teachers Table 18. Pin-up Board 19. Work Table Area 20. Single Seat Computer Table Area 21. Filing Cabinet, Steel Cabinet, Copy Machine 22. Instructional Area 23. Double Seat Computer Table Area 24. TV/VCR Cabinet 25. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 26. LCD Projector 27. Overhead Projector Trolley
10. Double-Sided Bookshelves 11. Single-Sided Bookshelves 12. Media Islands Area 13. Picture-Book Shelf, Newspaper Rack, Periodicals Shelf, Atlas Stand 14. AV Equipment Worktop
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.1-4
EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY BOOK SHELVES
EXAMPLE OF READING / REFERENCE AREA
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1no.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.2-1
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 1070M2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
(1070 M2 TO INCLUDE STAGE, CONTROL ROOM AND CHANGING ROOM)
NO. OF UNITS
AREA
FINISHES SEATING AREA AND STAGE

m2
Min. 910 ( for Seating Area including 3 badminton courts) Min. 30 m2 (for Stage Area) A full performance Stage must be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, a minimum basic stage (30 m2) shall be provided.
Floor Wall Ceiling
T&G Timber Strips Emulsion Paint (Seating Area) / Acoustic wall treatment (Rear of Hall) Suspended Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board DB closet Others Fire Retardant Motorized Stage Curtain (Stage) Nil Nil 1 no. 4.88m x 4.88m Wall Mounted Motorized Manually Operated Flybar on Stage
To provide for maximum student enrolment and teaching staff
FUNCTION
For school assembly, talks, concert, school examination and sports like badminton, gymnastics, aerobics, etc. Can explore provision for multiple usages
Projection Screen
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
2 nos. Wall Climbing Rack
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On ground or second storey Directly accessible from the main entrance of the school Should be adjacent to the Playfield and Outdoor Courts Preferably interconnected with Furniture Store
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2)
2 nos. minimum Hosereels 5 nos. Fire Extinguisher
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection screen should be positioned so that it is highly visible to all students in the Seating Area School crest to be provided above the stage
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 1 no. (Stage) 1 no. for every Column (Seating Area)
4 nos. (Stage) Area)
SERVICES
4 nos. 13A Twin Gang Power Points (Seating Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications 300/500 (Seating Area) 300 (Stage) Wall Mounted at 3-4.5m C/C
Row switching control for high bay lighting Microphone point position should be at same line as curtain line (if full performance stage is provided)
4 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Stage) Nil Sound Reinforcement System (Seating Area)
OTHERS
Steps to be provided at front of the stage Door into Hall to be min. 1.5m wide The number and location of access doors should ensure efficient circulation and discharge of students All openings should be adjustable to cater for varying ventilation and lighting requirements These openings should be operable from a service platform or corridor Badminton Area to have a min. clear height of 7.6m Control Room is to be linked at upper rear of the Hall
Intercom System (connecting Stage and Control Room) 2 nos. Telephone Points (Stage) Exit Light at every Exit
Water Supply Others
Nil
Isolator for Stage Lighting Stage Lighting System 2 nos. Battery Operated Clock
4 nos. Microphone Points (Seating Area)
3 nos. Microphone Points (Front part of Stage) 3 nos. Microphone Points (Behind Stage Area)
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.2-2
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
Plan
Section A-A
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE (IF PROVIDED WITHIN HALL)
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF BADMINTON COURTS
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.2-3
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR EXAMINATIONS
Section
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR ASSEMBLY
WALL CLIMBING RACK FOR PRIMARY SCHOOLS
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
ANCILLARY
NO. OF UNITS
1. Control Room (1 no.) 2. Stage (Min. 1 no. basic) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1)
4.3-1
1. CONTROL ROOM 2. STAGE 3. CHANGING ROOM & STORE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS
FINISHES
Floor Wall Concrete Topping (Control Room, Store) Non-Slip Tiles (Changing Room) Emulsion Paint (Control Room, Store) Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m Height (Changing Room) Glazing (Control Room) Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Control Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Changing Room, Store)
AREA
1. Control Room (8 m2 exclusive of Hall area) 2. Stage (Min. 30 m2 included within Hall area) 3. Changing Room + Store (As required within Hall area)
CAPACITY
1. Control Room (3 persons maximum) 2. Stage (To provide appropriate capacity for either basic stage or full performance stage) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1 person)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinet Others To provide (Dressing Area) Nil 1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m (Control Room) 2 nos. Dressing Tables with Wall Mirrors 1 no. Stage Light Control Desk (Control Room) 1 no. Sound Reinforcement System Housing Rack (Control Room)
FUNCTION
1. 2.
Control Room: To control the sound and lighting systems Changing Room: To provide toilet & dressing facilities for performers & stage crew only; Store: For storage of badminton posts, vaulting horses (2 nos.), landing mats (20 nos.), crash mats and trampoline
3.
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
1.
Control Room: At the rear of the hall and at least 3.6m above the Seating Area with unobstructed view of the Stage
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm (Control Room) Nil
2.
Changing Room: Easily accessible from the stage but ensure that noise in the Changing Room is not transmitted to the Stage and Seating Area Store: Directly accessible from Seating Area
3.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 4 nos. Single Gang (Control Room) 4 nos. Twin Gang (Changing Room) 1 no. Single Gang (Store) Lighting (Lux) 300 1 no. Wall Mounted (Control Room, Store) 1 no. Ceiling Mounted (Changing Room) per room AirConditioning Communicatio ns Water Supply Others Nil Intercom System (1 no. connecting Stage and Control Room) No. of taps to comply with latest statutory requirement 2 nos. Exhaust Fans (1 no. per Changing Room) Fans
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
To allow table/ cabinet for equipment in Control Room To provide door at back of stage for performers to enter and exit Changing Room to include min. 1 wash basin and 1 changing area
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
ANCILLARY 4.3-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 8 M2 CONTROL ROOM

LEGEND
1. Stage Layout Control Desk 2. Sound Reinforcement System Equipment Housing Rack
PHOTO OF HALL AND FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.4-1
FURNITURE STORE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65M2 STORE
FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
Storing of furniture Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil Nil Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Multi-Purpose Hall Preferably interconnected with Multi-Purpose Hall
Projection Screen
FITMENT/FURNITURE -SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2)
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1. 2. 3. 4.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.5-1
CANTEEN
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Non-Slip Tiles Concrete Topping (Store) Glazed Tile to minimum 2.2m height Emulsion Paint (Store) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Total Canteen areas to be min. 700 m2 Each Canteen area to comprise: Refreshment / Seating Area Food Stalls Central Wash Area Stores and toilets
CAPACITY
Total Canteen Areas to provide for maximum student enrolment over a maximum of 2 recess periods
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Foodstalls Tables Seating Benches Worktop 8 nos. including 2 nos. drinks stall 52 nos. 1.8m x 0.6m 104 nos. 1.8m x 0.3m 1 no. Food Preparation top per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) 2.1m wide serving counter per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) Wash Troughs 2 nos. Wash Troughs for Toothbrushing drills (with 5 tap points each) 1 no. Wash Sink per stall 3 nos. Dishwashing Trough Others 16 nos. Lockers (2 nos. per Foodstall)
FUNCTION
For preparation, serving, consumption of meals
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Field and Playcourts
1st storey accessible by vehicle for goods delivery Away from General Office and Teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Soap dispenser at students wash trough to be provided
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) See Vol. 4 2.3 2 nos. minimum Hosereels (See Vol. 4 1.2) 4 nos. Fire Extinguisher
OTHERS
Sufficient clearance outside of the Refreshment /seating area to be provided for queuing at food stalls Finishes for serving counter, stall worktop & fixtures to be stainless steel Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium Separate meters for gas, water and electrical for each stall Bottle Store to be min. 2.4m wide Central Wash area to provide separate washing trough for Muslim and non-Muslim stalls Lockable taps connected to separate meters to be provided at wash areas
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
As required 8 nos. (Refreshment Area) 24 nos. (3 nos. per stall) 1 no. (Store)
Lighting (Lux) Fans
300 18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Refreshment Area) 1 no. Wall Mounted per stall 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store)
Communications
PA System (Refreshment Area)(See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 Microphone Point 2 nos. Telephone Points (Public Phones)
Water Supply
10 nos. (Wash Trough) 2 nos. (Water Cooler) 8 nos. (Foodstall) 8 nos. (Central Wash Area)
Others
Minimum 8 nos. Gas points (Foodstall) Hood & Flue over cooking range at food stalls Isolator for Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Fans 2 nos. Water Coolers Minimum 2 nos. Vending Machines
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.5-2
CANTEEN
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 700 M2 CANTEEN

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Long Table & Bench Food Stalls Canteen Store/ Toilets/ Central Wash Area/ Bottle Store Wash Trough for Tooth-brushing Water Cooler Vending Machines Public Telephones
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.5-3
CANTEEN
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FOOD STALL / DRINK STALL
TYPICAL ELEVATION OF FOODSTALL FITMENT
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL WASH TROUGH
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
NON-TEACHING STAFF
ANCILLARY 4.6-1
(NTS) ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
10 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY
4 persons
FUNCTION
Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Near Principals Office and General Office
Projection Screen DB Closet
SERVICES
--
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Twin Gang 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Nil Nil
300
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.6-2
(NTS) ROOM
NON-TEACHING STAFF
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Dining Table & Chairs Area 2. High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.7-1
HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 TYPE FACILITY

1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Sports Flooring of Homogeneous Vinyl Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 Staff 20 Students
FUNCTION
Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m Nil
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Away from quiet areas Preferably on 1st storey
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas
1 no. full length mirror with timber bar
10 sets 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights rack rack
Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room
10 sets 1.5kg weight Dumbbells on weights 2 nos. Manual Treadmills for Juniors
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
2 nos. Bicycle Ergometers for Juniors 2 nos. Hydraulic Steppers for Juniors 16 nos. Step-Training Platforms 1 no. Target Heart Rate Chart
2 nos. Rowers (Non-Hydraulic) for Juniors
SERVICES
--
3 nos. Climbing Poles (Galvanised Pipes)
OTHERS
Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) 3 nos. Twin Gang 4 nos. of Wall Mounted at 2.5m minimum from floor level Nil 1 no.
300
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.7-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. 1 kg weight Dumbbells on weights rack 3. 1.5 kg weight Dumbbells on weights rack 4. Step Training Platforms 5. Bicycle Ergonomics 6. Manual Treadmills 7. Rowers 8. Hydraulic Steppers 9. Low Timber Cabinet 10. 1.5m high x 6mm thick mirror on plywood backing with aluminium trimming (mounted at 300mm above floor level) and floor mounted 6.0m long 40mm diameter timber wall-bar at 800mm from floor with 4 anchor points 11. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.8-1
GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
Storage of equipment for physical education/games Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Nil Nil
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
1st storey Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room
Teachers Table
1 no. 1.2m x 2.4m
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m High Open Shelves
High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) 3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls
FITMENT /FURNITURE
High Cabinets to store knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys High Open Shelves to store hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeepers pads, gloves and masks, softball bases, softballs, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes batons
DB Closet
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
1 single power point to be located near teachers table
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
OTHERS
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.8-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. High Cabinet 3. High Open Shelves 4. Aluminium Cages 5. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.9-1
CCA ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
3 nos.
AREA
65 m2 195 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets DB Closet Nil 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m 10 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m 2 nos. Filing Cabinets 1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Away from Teaching Area Preferably on 1st storey Near Field and Games Equipment Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 1 no. 1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Twin Gang 300 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. of Telephone Point Nil Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.9-2
CCA ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 CCA ROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers & Students Tables Area 2. Filing Cabinet 3. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 4. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.10-1
BOOKSHOP
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 12 m
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 2 Staff
FUNCTION
For sale of books and stationery Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Must be on 1st Storey Near Canteen Away from Classrooms and Staff Area
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Cabinets Nil Nil Nil Nil Counter Cabinet High Open Shelves
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Counter cabinet should not be higher than 750mm high
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
OTHERS
Grilles (if any) for the counter should be fixed on the external side of the roller shutter Roller shutter to be min. 1.8m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang 500 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil 1 no. Telephone Point Nil DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.10-2
BOOKSHOP
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP

LEGEND
1. Counter Cabinet 2. High Open Shelves Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.11-1
DENTAL CLINIC
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
42 m2
FINISHES
Floor Non-Slip Tiles (Dental Clinic) 100mm thk Concrete Plinth (Compressor Compartment) Wall Glazed Wall Tiles to Full Height (Dental Clinic) 100mm thick Brickwall with Glazed Wall Tiles internally (Compressor Compartment) Ceiling Non-acoustic Ceiling (Dental Clinic) Emulsion Paint (Compressor Compartment)
CAPACITY
2 students
2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist
FUNCTION
For carrying out dental health services
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey Away from Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Cabinets Others Blinds 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic Nil Nil Long Cabinet with Sinks High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) Waiting Bench Worktable
All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D) Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass door panels Wall Cabinet to have 1 adjustable shelf within
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Grilles to all Windows and Vents Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer
SERVICES
a. b. c.
Compressor Compartment: shall have a clear height of 2200mm light switch shall be located outside the compartment for easy reach control switch to the compressor shall be located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic Door to compartment to be 1.2m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset shall have 1 light fitting The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter. (See diagram on 4.11-3) Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator
d.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points for each Dental chair) Clinic) 5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no. 6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental
e. a. b. c. d.
Dental Unit:
See critical information for details Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator
1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment)
2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable 3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic) DB Closet as required PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3)
Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch. DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.
OTHERS
Windows shall be sliding type and top hung above. No fixed glass windows are allowed REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.11-2
DENTAL CLINIC
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Dental Units 2. Long Cabinet with Sinks 3. Worktable 4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser 5. Space for Autoclave 6. Waiting Area 7. High Cabinet 8. Waiting Bench 9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard
WSC PTD SD
Water Stop Cock Paper Towel Dispenser Soap Dispenser
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.11-3
DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Drain Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100 2. Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply 3. Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment) 4. Suction Control Cable wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor 5. Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination 6. Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 6 bar 7. Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer 5 Microns water filtration (if possible) 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor
TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT
REV-01 / MAY 06
2
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.12-1
PASTORAL CARE ROOM

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
40 students
FUNCTION
For conducting Pastoral Care activities Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Others Blinds 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. to cover minimum 30% of wall length 1 no. 1.5m x 1.5m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 -1.4) Low Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) 10 nos. Big Floor Cushions
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Pastoral Care Room should be on the same storey as Counseling Room Near Counseling Room and Staff Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 3 nos. Single Gang 500 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil Nil Nil DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.12-2
PASTORAL CARE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 PASTORAL CARE ROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Trapezoidal Activity Tables Area 3. Low Cabinet 4. Magnetic Whiteboard 5. Pin-up Board 6. Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
5 Services & Circulation

5.1
Toilets 5.2
LAN Room 5.3
Central Server Room 5.4
FAVE Area
2
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
5.1-1
TOILETS
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Non-Slip Tiles Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
As required
AREA
As required
CAPACITY
For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female. The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students. A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Soap Dispenser Cleansing Tap 1 no. for every two basins 1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet cubicle
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Others Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Nil
FUNCTION
Showering, changing, toilets needs
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Nil 1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets. Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas. Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area. Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet. Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block. 4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet
300 1 no. Wall Mounted Nil Nil 1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle 13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet. 1 no. Electric Hand Dryer Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles 7 nos. Water Coolers
clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.
FITMENT /FURNITURE
The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality. All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students. At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
5.1-2
TOILETS
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS
FITMENT /FURNITURE (CONT)

Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter. Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble. All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing. Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing. Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly. Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles. Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle. Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.
PEDESTAL TYPE
SERVICES
Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level. Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans. Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas. Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source. Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets. Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.
SQUAT PAN TYPE
OTHERS
Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet. Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials. Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height. Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings. Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle. Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.
URINAL
WASH BASIN
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
NO. OF UNITS
As required
5.2-1
LAN ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
AREA
7.5 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with Insulation on Inner Wall Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
--
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Racks (by others) 3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
FCU = 2 Heatload = 3.9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS
LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors Room height to be 2.7m minimum Maximum weight allowed: 1,500kg No windows allowed No viewing panel on door No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 2 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Nil Heat and Smoke detectors
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
CIRCULATION
SERVICES &
5.2-2
LAN ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM

LEGEND
1. Rack 2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 No. --
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
5.3-1
CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
NO. OF UNITS AREA
Min. 12.6 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Calcium Silicate or Cement Insulation on Inner Wall Board with
CAPACITY FUNCTION
--
Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Rack 5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
FCU = 4 Heat Load = 9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 4 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 2 nos. of Telephone Points Nil Heat and Smoke Detector
The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (minimum internal clearance) Room height to be min. 2.7m Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg No window allowed No viewing panel allowed on door No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
5.3-2
CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
LEGEND
1. Rack 2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
5.4-1
FAVE AREA
AREA
10% of schools circulation area (approximately 890 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.
Before expansion
Corridor Study Corner FAVE space
LOCATION
Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.
FUNCTION
To provide space for schools future expansion or modification of existing facilities. Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.
Staircase
Room Space
Room Space
OTHERS
If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 42 nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.
After expansion
Corridor
Staircase
Study
Corner
Room Space
optimized
REV-00 / FEB 06
6 External Works
6.1
Carpark, Driveway & Porch 6.2
Field, Fence & Footbath 6.3
Play Courts & Parade Square 6.4
Outdoor Fitness Area 6.5
Gates & Signwall 6.6
Guard Post
2
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.1-1
CARPARK, DRIVEWAY & PORCH

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL PRIMARY SCHOOL
NO. OF UNITS
As required. To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.
FINISHES
Road Marking Entrance Porch Bus Lots Carpark Motorcycle Lots Driveway 100mm wide LTA Approved Road Marking Paint Interlocking Pavers Interlocking Perforated Slab Interlocking Perforated Slab Interlocking Pavers Interlocking Pavers
DIMENSIONS
Porch shelter shall be min. 9.6m wide Min. 3.8m high for bus clearance Min. 4.5m high for fire engine clearance
PARKING LOTS USAGE

For staff and visitors vehicle parking.
Bus Lots Carpark Lots Motorcycle Lots
4 nos. 13.2m x 3.6m 23 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m 6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.1-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY
SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
1 no.
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

6.2-1
FOOTBATH
NO. OF UNITS
FIELD SIZE
Fenced-up area = 40.0m x 80.0m or 0.32ha (inclusive of tree-planting, buffer, etc.) A buffer of 3m all round field
FINISHES
Fence Sub-Soil Drain Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer
FIELD ORIENTATION
Ideally North-South Maximum deviation: 45 to North-South axis
GATES
Field Gates Side Gates Exit Gates 2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field 1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field 2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard Emergency Exit Only at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principals request.
HIGH FENCE
A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions: Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4 At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15 or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope. A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Others 2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided
DRAINAGE
Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains
OTHERS
Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works for the field.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

6.2-2
FOOTBATH
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF PRIMARY SCHOOL FIELD
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

6.2-3
FOOTBATH
SECTION A-A
PLAN OF FOOTBATH
ELEVATION 1
PLAN OF G.S GRATING
SECTION B-B
SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

6.2-4
FOOTBATH
CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE
Front Elevation
Side Elevation CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-1
PLAY COURTS & PARADE SQUARE

NO. OF UNITS
Play Courts 2 nos. Parade Square 1 no.
LOCATION
FINISHES
Basketball Backboard Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with Volleyball/Sepak Takraw Fast Borundico Galvanized Steel Post & Painted Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass Fast Borundico Support of Galvanized Steel &
To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint
NETBALL COURT
Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with
Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts
ALL COURTS
Netball Court Parade Square
Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated Interlocking Pavers with the Parade Square)
Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court Avoid planting tall trees near courts Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level All lines to be 50mm wide Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts
PARADE SQUARE
Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-2
(TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)
NETBALL COURT
Goal Ring
Elevation NETBALL GOAL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-3
See Detail A
BASKETBALL COURT
Front Elevation BASKETBALL POST
Side Elevation
DETAIL A
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-4
See Detail A
See Detail B
(COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )
VOLLEYBALL COURT
DETAIL A
REV-00 / 28 JAN 04
VOLLEYBALL POST
DETAIL B
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-5
ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.3-6
PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM
SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.4-1
OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA

RECOMMENDED FITNESS EQUIPMENT FOR PRIMARY SCHOOLS
AREA
120 m2 or 30.0m X 4.0m
LOCATION
Area to be located free from underground services
OTHERS
School principal to select 7 out of 11 fitness equipment
Horizontal Ladder
Climbing Ropes
Step Up/ Astride Jump Benches
Leg Raise
Inclined Flex Arm Hang
Forward Jump
Pull-up Bars Vertical Ladder
Sit-up Bench (4 pieces) Balance Beam
Parallel Bars
REV-00 / FEB 06
2
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.5-1
GATES & SIGNWALL
MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE

Open inwards Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes) 1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm.
SIGNWALL
Malay Chinese Tamil English
School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:
Plan
School crest to be provided School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above first storey
OTHERS
To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school. This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis. Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs.
Plan
Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION
REV-00 / FEB 06
Elevation SIDE GATE
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
6.5-2
GATES & SIGNWALL
SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL
SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHER FACILITIES
AREA
6.6-1
GUARD POST
Max. 4sqm
CAPACITY
2 security officers
FUNCTION
To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates; To log in visitors particulars and issue entry passes; To monitor activities on CCTV screen
LOCATION / PROXIMITY
To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Minimal provision. Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors enquiry.
SERVICES
provided.
Lighting and power points as required to be Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate. provided. Connection to schools CCTV network to be
Exterior view GUARD POST
OTHERS
Guard post design should not be opulent. Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft. Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security. Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required.
Interior of GUARD POST
REV-00 / FEB 06

Design Handbook Vol. 2 Primary School
S/ No.
1. 1.1-1
Page No.
Revision No.
01
Circular No. / Circular Date

03/2006 (May 06) Critical Info>Others
Amendment
- Proper distribution of M&E services
Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of Security Key System - Renamed Alarm System
2.
1.2-1 & 2
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted * Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Amended type of Security System Pg. 1.2-2>Legend: Inserted items 13 to 15
3.
2.2-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Pin-up board: - Amended text Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Kiln: - Rearranged text
4.
2.7-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical info>No. of units: - Amended no. of units Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor: Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Ceiling: - Omitted Suspended Ceiling Amended page reference
5.
4.5-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Wall: - Omitted Ceramic Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others: - Amended page reference - Omitted text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Communications: Amended page reference
6.
4.7-1 & 2
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical info>Fitment/Furniture: -Added mirror details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor: -Amended text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt >Fans: - Relocated detail description to Critical Info column 4.7-2>Drawing>Legend - Relocated detail of mirror to Critical Info column
7. 8.
4.10-1 4.11-1
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Master key: Amended page reference Critical info>Fitment/furniture:
- Amended detail on wall hung cabinet & wall cabinet Critical info>Services>Compressor compartment: - Amended door dimensions. >Services>Dental unit Amended page reference >Others -Amended Windows Recommended Provisions>Finishes: - Amended ceiling type

EDITION 2006
Vol. 3
Produced by
FOREWORD
> SECONDARY SCHOOL <
Vol. 3
CONTENTS
Introduction
General Teaching 1.1 1.2 Classroom Mother Tongue Language Room
Special Teaching 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.7
2.3 2.5
Humanities Workroom Commerce Room Art & Crafts Room Casting Room Art Store Audio Visual Room Project Room
Humanities Room
2.8
2.9
2.10 Music Room 2.11 Music Store
Audio Visual Store
2.12 Computer Room 2.13 IT Learning Resource Room 2.14 Chemistry Laboratory 2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory 2.17 Kitchen
2.16 Science Laboratorys Preparation Room 2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room 2.19 Needlework Room
REV 00 / FEB 06
Design & Technology 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.2 3.4 D&T Studio 2 D&T Studio 1
Wood Machineshop Design Room Store D & T Studio Store D & T Staff Room (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store) Design Room
D & T Studio (LS)
Administrative / Staff 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5
Vice-Principals Office Office Store General Office
Principals Office
4.6 4.7 4.9 4.8
Printing Room
Meeting Room Prefects Room Counselling Room
H.O.Ds Office
4.10 Career Guidance Room 4.11 Staff Room 4.12 Staff Lounge 4.14 Sickbay
4.13 Staff Resource Room
Ancillary 5.1 5.3 5.2
Media Resource Library Multi-Purpose Hall Furniture Store Multi-Purpose Hall
5.4 5.5 5.7 5.6
(1. Control Room 2. Changing Room 3. Store) Canteen
Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room
Bookshop
REV 00 / FEB 06
Ancillary ( cont) 5.8 5.9 Health & Fitness Room Games Equipment Store
5.10 Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room 5.11 NCC / NPCC Room 5.12 Rifle Range (Indoor) 5.13 Rifle Range (Outdoor) 5.14 Armoury 5.15 Dental Clinic
Services & Circulation 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Toilets & Showers LAN Room Central Server Room FAVE Area
External Works 7.1 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.2 Carpark, Driveway & Porch Field, Fence & Footbath Playcourts & Parade Square Outdoor Fitness Area Gates & Signwall Guard Post
List of Abbreviations Users Reference Master Revision List
REV 00 / FEB 06
Introduction
3
1.0 1.1 Introduction schools facilities. 1 2.0 2.1
VOL.
INTRODUCTION
The information found in this Volume is a compilation of data describing the major provisions and particular specifications for each of the
Planning Parameters The overall facility provisions were computed based on the following planning scenario: School operating on a single-session model
Having a max. enrolment of 1520 students (critical session) 2.2 In designing the provisions for each type of facility, the above planning parameters must be taken into account, unless otherwise stated. How to use this Volume Each facility is represented by a datasheet which lays down the recommended provisions as well as the critical requirements of the facility. A sample layout of the facility is also provided to show how the space within the facility could be configured. 3.2 The recommended provisions and sample layouts shown in the datasheets are to be used only as a guide by Consultants who are designing the facility. 3.3 As certain facilities may require revisions to their size and/or unit numbers or other details due to the schools specific programmes, Consultants are required to seek the schools and MOEs advice as to the relevancy of the information to the project. Should any deviation from the specifications be and the implications, if any, accordingly. necessary, the Consultant shall advise the school or MOE on the extent of it
3.0 3.1
The list of facilities is as tabulated in the Primary School and Secondary Schools Facilities Tables. (Refer to Vol. 1
- Chapters 4.7 & 4.8 of the School Design Handbook).
REV-00 / FEB 06
1 General Teaching
1.1
Classroom 1.2
Mother Tongue Language Room
3
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
(per school)
1.1-1
CLASSROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 34
When required, no. of units must be able to revert to 38 (90 m2 each).
FINISHES
AREA
Minimum module of 45 m2 per classroom m2 (38 units).
When required, area must be able to revert to 90
CAPACITY
For a module of 90 m2: 1 Staff, 40 Students For modules other than 90 m2: The appropriate space per student norm to be used to derive the capacity, based on the proposed function of the room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard Pin-up Board As required 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m length 1 no. 1.2m high x minimum 30% of rear wall 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable
FUNCTION
1.1-1
Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets
General Instruction Area Other possible functions include project work, multi-group activity, independent learning
1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Quiet zone Preferably near the Special Teaching areas
Computer Table State Flag
35 nos. 0.6m x 0.5m
1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m (See Vol. 4 1.2) As required
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Students seating to be minimum 3m clear from whiteboard Moveable wall partition if installed should have a minimum sound insulation of 42 dBA. State Flag shall be above all other decoration or emblem of any kind
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Others Key alike per room Master Key Set C (See Vol. 4 1.2) As required Nil
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 3 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher) 500 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) 6 nos. Ceiling Mounted 3 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher)
Classrooms should face North-South direction and address vision care needs (See Vol. 4 1.2) Walls between classrooms to be impact-resistant Window arrangement and other faade openings to be appropriately designed to suit the module size allocated to each classroom unit, and to take into account any future conversions to a different module size. Consideration must be given to the proper distribution of mechanical & electrical services as well.
Lighting (Lux) Fans
Nil Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
1.1-2
CLASSROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT (FOR A 90
M2
MODULE)
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. Cabinet 4. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Pin-up Board 6. Students Storage Cabinet Area 7. Computer Tables 8. LCD Projector 9. Printer
POSITION OF STATE FLAG/ MAGNETIC WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD AT FRONT WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
MOTHER TONGUE
1.2-1
LANGUAGE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
3 nos.
AREA
45 m2 per unit Total of 135 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Partition Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab between 2 Rooms
CAPACITY
1 Staff 20 Students
FUNCTION
Teaching of Mother Tongue Languages: Chinese, Tamil & Malay Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Nil 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable 10 nos. Mobile Table (See Vol. 4 1.4) High Cabinet with High Cabinet
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Staff Room
Centrally accessible from classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
2 rooms to be interconnected with sliding folding partition (See Vol. 4 1.2) Sliding folding partition to be usable as Pin-up Board
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
Nil
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points printer) 5 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
5 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
Lighting (Lux) Fans
500
3 nos. Ceiling Mounted
PA System (See Vol.4 2.3) Nil DB Closet as required
Nil
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
GENERAL TEACHING
MOTHER TONGUE
1.2-2
LANGUAGE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF MOTHER TONGUE LANGUAGE ROOMS
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Tables Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. LCD Projector 5. Sliding Folding Partition
REV-00 / FEB 06
2 Special Teaching
2.1 2.11
Humanities Room 2.2
Music Store 2.12
Humanities Workroom 2.3
Computer Room 2.13
Commerce Room 2.4
IT Learning Resource Room 2.14
Art & Crafts Room 2.5 Project Room 2.6
Chemistry Laboratory 2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory 2.16
Casting Room
Science Laboratorys Preparation Room/Store 2.17
Art Store 2.8 Audio Visual Room 2.9
2.7
Kitchen 2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room/Store 2.19
Audio Visual Store 2.10
Needlework Room
Music Room
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
2.1-1
HUMANITIES ROOM
AREA
FINISHES
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
For teaching of Humanities Subjects such as Geography and History Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m at rear of room Retractable with High Cabinet Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on the 2nd storey Interconnected with Humanities Store
Pin-up Board
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Cabinets should be provided to store equipment, models and students project work
Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinet
1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
SERVICES
--
20 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m Mobile Table (See Vol. 4 1.4)
1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 7 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
Lighting (Lux) Fans
4 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD)
6 nos. Ceiling Mounted at 2.5m minimum from floor level Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. TV
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.1-2
HUMANITIES ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF HUMANITIES ROOM SAMPLE LAYOUT
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Table Area 3. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Pin-up Board 5. LCD Projector Screen 6. TV
REV-01 / MAY 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
2.2-1
HUMANITIES WORKROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5M2 TYPE FACILITY
AREA
22.5 m2
FINISHES
Area to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
2 3 Teachers
FUNCTION
For storage of Humanities teaching aids and workspace for teachers Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Track Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on the 2nd storey Interconnected with Humanities Room
Projection Screen
Nil
Nil
High Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE SERVICES
--
High Cabinet to span length of room
SAFETY/SECURITY
OTHERS
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil
500
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.2-2
HUMANITIES WORKROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF HUMANITIES WORKROOM
LEGEND
1.
High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 no.
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.3-1
COMMERCE ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 135M2 TYPE FACILITY
NO. OF UNITS AREA
135 m2 comprising: Teaching area and Practical Simulation area Total area to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Emulsion Paint
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
Non-Acoustic Ceiling
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/ Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and with High Cabinet As required
For teaching of Elements of Office Practice Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near General Office and Staff Room so that equipment could be used for non-teaching purposes
Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Reception counter to be movable on rollers
16 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m (See Vol. 4 1.4)
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m
Retractable
SERVICES
--
Others
2 nos. Table for Typewriters 1 no. Reception Counter
OTHERS
Minimum 2 door openings Vinyl flooring must be heavy duty to withstand equipment loads, scratch-resistant to withstand furniture movement
SAFETY/SECURITY
1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 12 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for 12 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 500 Nil 14 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) printer)
1 no. TV
1 no. Fax Machine 1 no. Photocopier DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.3-2
COMMERCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMMERCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Table Area 3. Reception Counter 4. Sofa Set 5. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard and Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 6. Table for Typewriter 7. Photocopier & Fax Machine on Low Cabinet 8. LCD projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1 no.
2.4-1
ART & CRAFTS ROOM

AREA
Min. 135 m2
If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint / Sliding Folding Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab between 2 rooms Partition
CAPACITY
40 Students
1-2 Staff/Supervisors
Ceiling
FUNCTION
Instructional Strategies Still life sketching and other Art and Crafts activities Storage of Art works and materials Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m integrated with High 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable Cabinet integrated with High Cabinet
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Min. 1 Art & Crafts Room preferably adjoining an open courtyard, balcony or field to hold larger/ bulky projects and for drying pottery/clay sculptures 2 Art & Crafts Rooms shall preferably be located on the ground floor Interconnected with Art Store, Casting Room and Project Room
35 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m x 0.8m Low Cabinet High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board Worktop with High Cabinet Soap Dispenser Low Cabinet with Sinks
1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m
(See Vol. 4 1.4)
Others
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Counter top with sink to be of non-porous finish Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for mounting of display items All fitment located outside Art and Crafts Room must be weather-resistant
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Security Grilles to Drying Terrace 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES
Ceiling mounted track lighting to be provided for still life session
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points printer) 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for
OTHERS
Drying terrace to be a hard non-porous surface with a 2.5m minimum shelter/ overhang to protect from rain Drying terrace should be fenced, with access only from the Art and Crafts Room Sliding folding acoustic partition to be usable for display
8 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher &
Lighting (Lux) Fans
1 no. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) 2 nos. Track Lighting
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 3 nos. DB Closet as required
Nil
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.4-2
ART & CRAFTS ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF TWO ART & CRAFTS ROOMS OF 135 M2 EACH
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Students Table Area 3. Still life session arrangement for 18 students 4. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 5. Low Cabinet 6. High Cabinet with Worktop 7. Low Cabinet with Sink 8. Sliding Folding Partition 9. 3m long lighting track 10. LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.4-3
ART & CRAFTS ROOM
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FURNITURE LAYOUT
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
(For still life session: seating arrangement for 18 students)
PHOTO OF ART & CRAFTS ROOM AS SEEN FROM SIDE OF ROOM
PHOTO OF PROJECT ROOM

REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.5-1
PROJECT ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
A AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 Staff 6 Students
FUNCTION
Photographic Work, Pyrography, Ceramics, Print Making, etc. Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Pin-up Board Cabinets
Near Art Store and Casting Room Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room
Projection Screen (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Nil
Nil
Low Cabinet with Open Shelves Low Cabinet with 2 nos. Sinks
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Solid surfacing finish for sink counter top
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Both sinks to be close to each other
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 3 nos. 13 Amp 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil
500
2 nos. Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3)
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.6-1
CASTING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5M2 TYPE FACILITY
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
22.5 m2 Area to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
10 Persons
FUNCTION
Practical works relating to hand crafted and 3-D art projects such as ceramic structure, print making, modeling with clay & Plaster of Paris
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room Near Art Store and Project Room
Pin-up Board Cabinets Others
Projection Screen (See Vol.4 1.4)
Nil
Nil
Low Cabinet with Open Shelves Low Cabinet with Sink
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Solid surfacing finish for counter tops and backsplash for sink Both sinks to be close to each other
1 no. Kiln
SERVICES
possible
Exhaust fan to be located as close to the kiln as Clay trap to be provided for each sink
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
Solid Door
OTHERS
Access to Casting Room should be from the Art & Crafts Room and not directly from corridor The Kiln should be placed against an external wall opening for effective heat dissipation
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 1 no. 13 Amp
300 Nil
1 no. 30A 3 phase for Kiln
2 nos. (1 no. per sink) DB Closet as required 1 no. Exhaust Fan
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.6-2
CASTING ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 22.5 M2 CASTING ROOM

LEGEND
1. Low Cabinet with Open Shelves 2. Kiln
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
--
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.7-1
ART STORE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 22.5 M2 ART STORE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 22.5 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY FUNCTION
Storage of art materials and large folios Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Should be easily accessible from the corridor Near Project Room and Casting Room Interconnected with Art & Crafts Room
Projection Screen
Nil
Nil
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Folio Cabinet
Supply Cabinet
Folio cabinet to span longest wall length
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
OTHERS
Store door to be minimum 1.2m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.7-2
ART STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT
LEGEND
1. Folio Cabinet 2. Supply Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.8-1
AUDIO VISUAL ROOM

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Acoustic Treatment
CAPACITY
1 Staff 80 Students
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/Blinds Whiteboard 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated 2 nos. 1.4 x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinets 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board with High Cabinet Blackout Blinds
For screening of films, slides, OHP, transparency, filmstrips, television, etc. Can be converted into other facilities
Pin-up Board
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Centrally located with respect to Classroom and preferably near Media Resource Library Interconnected with Audio Visual Store Should not be on 1st storey Separated from Design & Technology Areas
Projection Screen Cabinets DB Closet Others
Retractable
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
(See Vol. 4 1.4)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
82 nos. 0.62m x 0.45m Students Chairs
Students chairs to have adjustable writing board
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy Proof-Lock with Door
SERVICES
1 power point at midway of central aisle is required
OTHERS
Max. viewing Distance from last row of seat to screen to be 6 x width of screen Min. Viewing Distance from 1st row of seat to be 2 x width of screen Base of screen to be 1.2m above floor level
Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications
1 no. Single Gang
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Telephone Point
A/C to be provided with Isolator Sound Reinforcement System
Water Supply Others
Nil
1 no. TV
1 no. LCD
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.8-2
AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT
SECTION
LEGEND
1. Student Seats with Writing Top 2. High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Sliding Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 3. LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.8-3
AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
PHOTOS SHOWING AUDIO VISUAL ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.9-1
AUDIO VISUAL STORE

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
Storage of audio and visual equipment Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Interconnected with Audio Visual Room
Nil
Nil
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Low Cabinet
Open Shelves
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.10-1
MUSIC ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 135 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Teak Parquet Acoustic Treatment Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
40 Students
FUNCTION
For conducting lessons, choir practice and orchestra practice Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain/Blinds Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets Others Blackout Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic with 1m Manuscript Lines integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted Retractable 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m 5 nos. 0.7m x 0.6m High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4) 40 nos. Practice Modules
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from Classroom areas Interconnected with Music Store Separated from general and other specific teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2.4m high mirror on wall opposite whiteboard 2 nos. grab bars at 840mm and 1050mm from the floor level and 250mm from the mirrored wall (in Music Room 1 only)
SERVICES
---
OTHERS
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Door Closer & Viewing Panel 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
Room layout to be determined by orchestra practice requiring the largest area Door to be 1.2m 1.5m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. TV 1 no. Piano 1 no. Hi-Fi set Other Instruments DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.10-2
MUSIC ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 MUSIC ROOM
MODULE A: ORCHESTRA PRACTICE

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
MODULE B: CHOIR PRACTICE
MODULE C: TEACHING PURPOSE
Teachers Table Module A Piano Computer Table Area High Cabinet with Sliding Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
6. 7. 8.
LCD Projector TV Full Height Mirror
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
--
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.11-1
MUSIC STORE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 45 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY FUNCTION
Storage of musical instruments, teaching aids and accessories Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY FITMENT/FURNITURE SERVICES

--
Interconnected with Music Room
Projection Screen
Nil
Nil
All shelves to be adjustable
1 no. cabinet for curriculum music
1 no. cabinet for band instruments
OTHERS
Room to be 5.0m minimum wide Door to be 1.2m 1.5m wide
SAFETY/SECURITY
Solid Door
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.11-2
MUSIC STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 45 M2 MUSIC STORE
LEGEND
1. Cabinet for Curriculum Music 2. Cabinet for Band Instrument
REV-00 / FEB 06
2 Special Teaching
2.1 2.11
Humanities Room 2.2
Music Store 2.12
Humanities Workroom 2.3
Computer Room 2.13
Commerce Room 2.4
IT Learning Resource Room 2.14
Art & Crafts Room 2.5 Project Room 2.6
Chemistry Laboratory 2.15 Biology/Physics Laboratory 2.16
Casting Room
Science Laboratorys Preparation Room/Store 2.17
Art Store 2.8 Audio Visual Room 2.9
2.7
Kitchen 2.18 Kitchen Preparation Room/Store 2.19
Audio Visual Store 2.10
Needlework Room
Music Room
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.12-1
COMPUTER ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 4
AREA
Min. 135 m2 (including Workroom)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4-1.3) Emulsion Paint 1.8m x 1.2m viewing glass panel on Computer Workroom wall Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
Hands-on computer-based learning Computer Workroom for Technical Assistant Can explore provision for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets (See Vol. 4 1.4) As required 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.3m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted and Retractable 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (Computer Workroom) 21 nos. 1.6m x 0.7m High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board
Interconnected with Computer Workroom
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES
1 twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in service outlet box for each computer table 1 twin gang power point and 1 LAN point mounted in service outlet box for teachers table Room lights to be controlled row by row parallel to whiteboard
OTHERS
Visual connection between Computer Workroom and Computer Rooms to be provided Vinyl floor finish to be anti-static type
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 44 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom) 26 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher, 1 no. for printer & 1 no. for workroom) 1 no. Single Gang for LCD Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.12-2
COMPUTER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 135 M2 COMPUTER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF COMPUTER WORKROOM

LEGEND
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
IT LEARNING
2.13-1
RESOURCE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 90 m2 If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above shall be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl with concealed floor trunking (See Vol. 4 -2.3) Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
1 Staff 42 Students
FUNCTION
Hands-on Computer based Group Learning Can explore provision for multiple usages (for min. 1 unit) If there is more than 1 unit, the 2nd unit and above can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Cabinets Blinds 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable 1 no. 1.6m x 0.7m 14 nos. 1.6/0.8m x 0.7m Trapezoidal Table (See Vol. 4 1.4) High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board (See Vol. 4 1.4)
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Near Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Projection Screen to be positioned centrally to room
SERVICES
1 no. twin gang power point and 2 LAN points mounted in Cable TV outlet box for 2 computer tables
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 17 nos. (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 11 nos. Twin Gang (including 1 no. for teacher & 1 no. for printer) 2 nos. Single Gang (including 1 no. for LCD) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Master Switch DB Closet as required
REV-01 /MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
IT LEARNING
2.13-2
RESOURCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 90 M2 IT LEARNING RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.14-1
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 2
AREA
Min. 144 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
For conducting Chemistry lessons and experiments Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable Blackout Curtains
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st storey Near Biology and Physics laboratories Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Interconnected with Science Preparation Room
Pin-up Board
Projection Screen Teachers Bench Students Bench Cabinets Others
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m
10 nos. 3.6m x 0.8m with Sink 1 no. Fume Cupboard
1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Side/Rear Cabinet cum Workbench with Sink
4 students to 1 students workbench 4 nos. workbench cum cabinet to be provided at side and/or rear of lab (See sample layouts 1 & 2) Sufficient knee space along both lengths of students workbench to be provided so that 4 students (facing each other) can sit comfortably during group activities Acid resistant top to workbenches to be epoxy resin Workbenches to have anti-spill edge Sinks and sanitary piping to be polypropylene Safety Screen for Teachers Bench to be provided
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy- Proof Lock
Overhead emergency shower 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES
Fume cupboard to have 1 no. gas point Teachers workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each students bench to have 2 nos. gas points, 1 no. computer point located at the side nearest the central aisle, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 6 nos. twin gang power points evenly distributed and 2 nos. sinks Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories Exhaust duct to roof level to be provided for fume cupboard All trenches to have solid trench cover composing of steel frame and tile infill Authorities requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 11 nos. (10 nos. for students benches, 1 no. for teachers bench) 30 nos. Twin Gang
500 Nil
13 nos. 3-way swan neck lab taps 1 no. for emergency shower 26 nos. gas points (double outlet)
1 nos. gas point for fume cupboard DB Closet as required
OTHERS
Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students workbenches area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.14-2
CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for elongated lab)
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2 FOR A 144 M2 LAB (for square lab)

LEGEND
1. Teachers Bench with Sink on 0.15m high platform 2. Students Bench with Sink 3. Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 4. Fume Cupboard 5. Overhead Shower Area 6. Side or Rear Cabinet cum Workbench with Sink 7. Workbench Module 8. LCD Projector
REV-01 / MAY 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
BIOLOGY/PHYSICS
2.15-1
LABORATORY
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Emulsion Paint Homogenous Tiles
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 4
AREA
Min. 144 m2
CAPACITY
1 Staff 40 Students
FUNCTION
experiments
For conducting Physics and Biology lessons and Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m 1 no. 2.4m x 2.4m Wall Mounted Retractable 10 nos. 1.6 m x 1.0 m 1 no. 4.2m x 0.8m with Sink Blackout Blinds
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
All Laboratories are to be grouped together such that they can be cordoned off during examinations Every 2 labs to be interconnected with Science Preparation Room
Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Bench Students Bench Cabinets
FITMENT/FURNITURE
4 students (with 2 sets of 2 students facing each other) to one students workbench Acid resistant worktops to laboratory benches to be epoxy resin Workbenches in Physics laboratories to have bull-nosed edge Workbenches in Biology laboratories to have anti-spill edge Sufficient knee clearance for seated students to be provided at all workbenches Safety Screen for Teachers Bench to be provided
3 nos. 8.1m x 0.8m Side Workbench with Sink Wall mounted Microscope Cupboards (for Biology laboratories only)
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Overhead emergency shower
SERVICES
Teachers workbench to have 1 no. gas point, 1 no. computer point, 2 nos. twin gang power points and 1 no. water point At each island core unit, 3 nos. water points shall be provided. Where the side is to be connected to the students bench, there shall be 2 nos. computer point & 2 nos. twin gang power points each Each side cabinet cum workbench to have 4 nos. gas points, 4 nos. twin gang power points and 2 nos. LAN points evenly distributed Services pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor laboratories All services trenches to have solid trench cover composed of steel frame and tile infill Authorities requirements, e.g. PowerGas to be complied with
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports 27 nos. comprising: (20 nos. at students benches, 1 no. at teachers bench & Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 36 nos. Twin Gang 6 nos. at side/rear workbench)
Nil
8 nos. Ceiling Mounted PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3)
500
19 nos. 3-way Swan-neck
OTHERS
1 no. for Emergency Shower
Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Overhead emergency shower area to have 100mm drop in floor level Position of projector and projection screen to be determined on-site to ensure full view from students seating area The area of projection on the screen to be maximised and unobstructed
13 nos. gas points (double outlet)
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
BIOLOGY/PHYSICS
2.15-2
LABORATORY
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 144 M2 PHYSICS / BIOLOGY LAB
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Teachers Workbench Students Bench Island Core Unit Side Workbenches with Sink Overhead Shower Area Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board, Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen Microscope Cupboard (Wall Mounted) LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
BIOLOGY/PHYSICS
2.15-3
LABORATORY
SAMPLE OF ISLAND CORE UNIT
SAMPLE OF A CLUSTER OF LABORATORY BENCHES
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
BIOLOGY/PHYSICS
2.15-4
LABORATORY
PHOTO OF BIOLOGY/PHYSICS LABORATORY
CLOSE-UP OF ISLAND CORE UNIT AT STUDENTS WORKBENCH
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
SCIENCE LABORATORYS
2.16-1
PREPARATION ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 3
AREA
Min. 50 m2
Floor Wall
Homogenous Tiles
CAPACITY
2 Staff
Ceiling
Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
FUNCTION
Preparation for experiments, storage of equipment & work area for Laboratory Assistant Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Interconnected with Science Laboratories
Projection Screen
Nil
Workbench cum overhead storage with 2 Workstations and Sink (See Vol. 4 - 1.4) Movable High Cabinet with Glass Doors
Nil
Acid resistant worktop to be epoxy resin Sinks and sanitary pipes to be polypropylene Workbench to be designed to accommodate computer workstations at appropriate height and with knee clearances for staff seating Overhead storage cabinet to have glass doors Movable high cabinet to have timber-framed glass doors with ventilation gaps
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm (for Chemistry Preparation Room) 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Solid Door Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES
Service pipe trenches to be provided for ground floor Lab Preparation Room LAN points to be 200mm above counter top
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 3 nos. Twin Gang 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil 2 nos.
Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Connecting doors to be provided to laboratories Doors to be located near entrance of laboratories
500
1 no. 3-way Swan-Neck Laboratory Taps DB Closet as required 2 nos. Gas Points (double outlet)
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
SCIENCE LABORATORYS
2.16-2
PREPARATION ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 50 M2 LAB PREPARATION ROOM

LEGEND
1. Workbench cum overhead storage with 2 Workstations and Sink 2. Cabinet with Glass Door
PHOTOS OF SCIENCE LABORATORYS PREPARATION ROOM/STORE
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.17-1
KITCHEN
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 2
AREA
Min. 125 m2 comprising: 1. Instructional area 2. Practical area 3. Resource area (for 1 kitchen only)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles Glazed Ceramic Tiles to min 2.2m height Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 Staff 20 Students
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
FUNCTION
For cookery lessons Can explore provision for multiple usages
Pin-up Board
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m Retractable Bench
Preferably on the 1st storey and should not be higher than the 2nd storey Interconnected with Kitchen Preparation Room All kitchens preferably on same storey, but Needlework Room can be on different storey
1 no. 3.5m x 0.6m Teachers Demonstration 10 nos. 3.7m x 0.6m Students Workbench Low Cabinet Resource Corner Cabinet (for 1 kitchen only) Low Cabinet with Louvred Door Open Shelves Low Cabinet with Louvred Door with Sink Display Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2 students per workbench Sinks to be well distributed and accessible from workbench Teachers Demonstration Bench to incorporate double bowl sink with space for electric cum gas cooker at the end
Others
4 nos. double bowl sink & 2 nos. single bowl for students 1 no. single bowl sink for teacher
2 nos. 1.5m x 0.8m Storage Table
SERVICES
Students workbench and Teachers demonstration bench to have 1 no. twin gang, 1 no. single gang and power point each Ceiling fans are not to be located directly above gas hob LAN and power points for computers to be appropriately distributed at front and rear of kitchen
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
OTHERS
2 Kitchens with 1 preparation room/store to be provided for all schools including boys school Solar panels are to be located on the accessible RC Flat roof nearest to kitchens
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 5 nos. 13 nos. Twin Gang Resource Corner)
18 nos. Single Gang (including 2 nos. for
500 Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. LCD
1 no. Swan-neck per sink (Hot and Cold) 11 nos. Gas Point
1 no. Solar Heater 1 no. Refrigerator
11 nos. Electric cum Gas Cooker 2 nos. Microwave Oven
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.17-2
KITCHEN
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1 OF A 125 M2 KITCHEN
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2 OF A 125 M2 KITCHEN
LEGEND
1. Teachers Demonstration Bench 2. Students Workbench 3. Gas Hob 4. Resource Centre Cabinet (for 1 Kitchen only) 5. Open Shelves 6. Display Cabinet 7. Storage Table 8. Low Cabinet with Microwave Oven 9. Low Cabinet with Louvred Door 10. Refrigerator 11. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Boards 12. LCD Projector
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.17-3
KITCHEN
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF COOKING STATIONS

LEGEND
1. Storage Table 2. Low Cabinet / Microwave Oven 3. Students Workbench 4. Electric cum Gas Cooker 5. Low Cabinet with Louvred Doors with Sink 6. Low Cabinet/Resource Corner Cabinet (for 1 Kitchen only)
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF DEMONSTRATION AREA (FOR GROUP OF 20 STUDENTS)

LEGEND
1. Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen 2. Teachers Demonstration Bench with built-in sink and standalone Electric cum Gas Cooker 3. 0.3m x 0.3m Stools Area for 20 students
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.17-4
KITCHEN
PHOTO OF KITCHEN
PHOTO OF COOKING STATIONS
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
KITCHEN PREPARATION
2.18-1
ROOM/STORE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 42m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab Glazed Ceramic Tiles to minimum 2.2m height
CAPACITY
Max. 4 persons
FUNCTION
Preparation of materials/ food for cookery lessons, teachers workroom Can explore provision for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preparation Room should be located near the corridor Entry to the Preparation Room should be via the Kitchen Interconnected with Kitchen Preferably near Needlework Room
Pin-up Board Teachers Cabinets
Projection Screen Workstation (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Nil
Nil
3 nos. 2.0m x 0.6m Workstation Low Cabinet with Sink Charts Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Wall Hung Display Cabinet High Cabinet with Drawers High Cabinet Low Cabinet
Cabinets to be provided for the storage of charts, audio visual materials like film strips, video tapes, transparencies, etc. Cupboard for storage of brooms, dustbins, vacuum cleaners, etc.
Worktop with High Cabinet
1 no. 0.9m x 0.6m Wash Trough [Laundry Area] 1 no. Laundry Trough
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Nil 3 nos. 13 Amp
Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications System Water Supply Others
300 Nil
2 nos. 15 Amp (for washing machine and dryer)
2 nos. Ceiling Mounted PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3)
3 nos. (2 nos. for Wash Trough and 1 no. for Washing Machine) 1 no. Dryer 1 no. Washing Machine DB Closet as required
1 no. Telephone Point
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
KITCHEN PREPARATION
2.18-2
ROOM/STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 KITCHEN PREPARATION ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Low Cabinet with Sink Wall Hung Display Cabinet Teachers Workstation Charts Cabinet or High Cabinet with Drawers Low Cabinet and Wall Hung Display Cabinet Worktop with High Cabinet High Cabinets Laundry Trough Washing Machine
10. Dryer 11. Wash Trough
PHOTOS OF KITCHEN PREPARATION ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.19-1
NEEDLEWORK ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
1 No.
AREA
2. 3. 4.
115 m2 comprising: 1. General Instruction Area Resource & Science Corner Sewing/Machining Dressing Room (min. 8.4 m2)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Emulsion Paint (Glazed Ceramic Tiles to area) Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles
minimum 2.2m height at Resource & Science Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
Area to be School White Area (SWA)
Ceiling
CAPACITY
1 Staff 18 Students 10 Sewing Stations
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic
FUNCTION
Sewing, Study of fabric etc Can be converted into other facilities
Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Sewing Stations (See Vol. 4 1.4)
3 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. at General
Instruction Area, 2 nos. at Sewing/ Machining) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Kitchen and Kitchen Preparation Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
9 nos. 1.5m x 0.8m High Cabinet
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m
Retractable
10 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m
SERVICES
Garment Cabinet Open Shelves Cabinet with Rack Display Cabinet Wing Mirror
Water supply to be provided at Resource & Science Corner
Low Cabinet with Sink
OTHERS
Ironing area must be sufficient to accommodate 3 ironing boards
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
5 nos. (General Instruction Area)
15 nos. 13 Amp (General Instruction Area) 1 no. 13 Amp (Resource & Science Area) 20 nos. 13 Amp (Sewing / Machining)
500 Nil
1 no. per sink (Resource & Science Area) Science Area)
1 no. portable Bunsen Burner (Resource &
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SPECIAL TEACHING
2.19-2
NEEDLEWORK ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 115 M2 NEEDLEWORK ROOM

LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. General Instruction Area 3. Resource & Science Area 4. Sewing/Machining Area 5. Dressing Area 6. High Cabinet with Rack 7. Garment Cabinet 8. High Cabinet 9. Wing Mirror 10. Curtain 11. Display Cabinet 12. Low Cabinet with Sink 13. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Boards 14. LCD Projector 15. Computer Workstations Area 16. Open shelves
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Teachers Table Students Table Open Shelves Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projector Screen LCD Projector
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GENERAL INSTRUCTION AREA (min. 51 m2)
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 Design & Technology

3.1
D&T Studio 1 3.2
D&T Studio2 3.3 Wood Machineshop 3.4
Design Room 3.5
Design Room Store 3.6
D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store) 3.7
D&T Staff Room 3.8
D&T Studio (LS)
3
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.1-1
D&T STUDIO 1
NO. OF UNITS
1 nos.
AREA
Min. 360 m2
CAPACITY
3 Staff 56 students
FUNCTION
Multi-purpose D&T Studio (mainly woodwork and metalwork) for upper secondary students Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from quiet zone Must be on 1st storey Interconnected with Tool Store and Wood Machineshop Near Main Store, D&T Staff Room and D&T Switch Room Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas
2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and
Integrated Bench (See Vol. 4 1.4)
22 nos. 1.53m x 0.9m
2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m
Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks
FITMENT/FURNITURE
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 1.2)
Concrete countertop shall be epoxy paint finish
SERVICES
Solid Door
Isolator to be provided for each equipment except folding machines and treadle shears All machines to be provided with 3 phase electrical supply 440V Equipment on stands to be fixed at 0.6m above F.F.L Gas Forges to be served by ducted mechanical exhaust system with hoods
Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Points Power Points 18 nos. 13A Single Gang 500 Nil 2 nos. 15A Single Gang Nil
OTHERS
Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment
Spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances to be complied with Safety zone for equipment to be 0.9m all around, where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide Backsplash to be in epoxy paint finish Service and access road to technical block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. width of 1.8m Unloading/ Loading floor slab at 2nd storey should
6 nos. (3 nos. per sink) Forging Hearths
PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m Brazing Hearths & Gas 5 nos. 1000kg 1.5m x 0.8m Metal Lathes 1 no. 30kg 0.6m x 0.6m Welding Unit
1 no. 120kg 0.7m x 0.7m Pedestal Grinder 1 no. 1500kg 1.2m x 1.0m Milling Machine 1 no. 240kg 1.0m x 0.8m Power Hacksaw 1 no. 500kg 1.2m x 1.5m Treadle Shears 1 no. 150kg 0.7m x 0.5m Pillar Drill 1 no. CNC Lathe/ Mill Others 16 nos. Isolator 2 nos. 300kg 1.5m x 0.7m Wood Lathes 2 nos. 100kg 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machine 2 nos. Gas Points 1 no. 400kg 1.2m x 1.0m Folding Machine
be strengthened for heavy machinery and vibration
7 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06
2 nos. Exhaust Fans (for Gas Forging Hearths)
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.1-2
D&T STUDIO 1
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 360 M2 STUDIO

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Integrated Benches Area Teachers Table Metal Lathes with Isolators Finishing Area Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers LCD Projector Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sinks Buffing Machines with Isolators Wood Lathes with Isolators Folding Machine
11. Treadle Shears 12. Brazing Hearths & Gas Forging Hearths With Isolator 13. Pedestal Grinder with Isolator 14. Welding Unit With Isolator 15. Milling Machine With Isolator 16. CNC Machine 17. Power Hacksaw with Isolator 18. Pillar Drill with Isolator 19. Whiteboard & Projector Screen 20. Emergency Stop Station Point
REV-01 / May 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.1-3
D&T STUDIO 1
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA
FINISHING AREA
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.1-4
D&T STUDIO 1
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF WOOD LATHES LAYOUT CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF METAL LATHES LAYOUT
Alternative 1
LAYOUT OF METAL LATHES AREA
Alternative 2 ALTERNATIVE LAYOUTS OF WOOD LATHE AREA
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.2-1
D&T STUDIO 2
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Min. 240
m2
Floor Wall Ceiling
CAPACITY
3 Staff 56 students
Concrete Topping Emulsion Paint
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic
Multi-purpose D&T Studio for lower secondary students Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from quiet zone Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than second storey Interconnected with Tools Store Near D&T Studio 1, Design Room and Main Store Separated from General Teaching and other Special Teaching Areas
2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and 2 nos.
Integrated Bench (See Vol. 4 1.4)
22 nos. 1.525m x 0.9m
Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
Solid Door
Grilles to all Windows and Vents 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers
OTHERS
Concrete countertop shall be epoxy finish The spacing between benches and equipment are recommended safety distances and should be complied with Where columns are situated within this spacing, clearance of 0.9m should be given from bench/equipment to column Clear height of room to be min. 3.6m Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 2.1m (external) wide Service and access road to D&T block is required for loading and unloading of heavy machinery Staircase leading to 2nd storey should have a min. width of 1.8m Note: D&T Studio (Lower Secondary (LS)) is to be provided for schools offering only lower secondary D&T curriculum
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Nil 22 nos. 13A Single Gang 2 nos. 15A Single Gang
Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment Others
500 Nil
3 nos. cold
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 2 nos. 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machines 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.3m Scroll Saw 2 nos. Isolator (440V electrical supply)
3 nos. Gas Points (Brazing Hearths and Gas Soldering) 6 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.2-2
D&T STUDIO 2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 240 M2 D&T STUDIO 2

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Integrated Benches Area Teachers Table Planning Area Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet & Sink LCD Projector 7. Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering 8. Buffing Machine with Isolator 9. Scroll Saw 10. Whiteboard & Projector Screen 11. Emergency Stop Station Point
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF INTEGRATED BENCHES AREA

REV-01 / MAY 06
3 Design & Technology

3.1
D&T Studio 1 3.2
D&T Studio2 3.3 Wood Machineshop 3.4
Design Room 3.5
Design Room Store 3.6
D&T Studio Store (1. Studio Store 2. Main Store) 3.7
D&T Staff Room 3.8
D&T Studio (LS)
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
3.3-1
WOOD MACHINESHOP
AREA
Min. 124 m2 (including Timber Store)
FINISHES
CAPACITY
8 Persons
FUNCTION
Preparation of timber works by staff and storage of timber Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board DB Closet Others Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Must be located at 1st storey away from quiet area Direct access from Design & Technology Studio 1 and corridor Nearby Design & Technology Studio 2, Studio Store 1 and Studio Store 2
Projection Screen
Nil
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
1 no. 0.5m x 0.4m Stainless Steel Sink
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
1 no. Fire Extinguisher Solid Door Grilles to all Windows and Vents
Relationship of equipment should not be changed as they relate to work flow and safety requirement Room should be rectangular and column free Clear height of room to be 3.6m min. Door to be min. 1.8m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment Nil 5 nos. Single Gang (1 no. for Timber Store)
500 Nil
6 nos. Ceiling Mounted (1 no. for Timber Store)
1 no. cold
1 no. 290kg 0.8m x 0.5m Cross-out Saw 1 no. 250kg 0.7m x 0.6m Mortiser 1 no. 250kg 0.8m x 0.5m Bandsaw
1 no. 550kg 0.9m x 0.8m Thicknesser 1 no. 250kg 1.5m x 2.2m Rip Saw 1 no. 0.8m x 0.5m Grinder 8 nos. Isolators
1 no. 500kg 1.7m x 0.8m Surface Planer 1 no. 75kg 0.5m diameter Dust Extractor Others
3 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.3-2
WOOD MACHINESHOP
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 124 M2 WOOD MACHINESHOP SHOWING CRITICAL DIMENSIONS AND THEIR RELATIONSHIPS (RELATED TO WORKFLOW)
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Bandsaw with Isolator Mortiser with Isolator Rip Saw with Isolator Thicknesser with Isolator Cross-out Saw with Isolator Surface Planer with Isolator
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Timber Store Area Grinder with Isolator Stainless Steel Sink Dust Extractor with Isolator Magnetic Whiteboard Emergency Stop Station Point
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.4-1
DESIGN ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 200 M2 TYPE FACILITY FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
CAPACITY
2 Staff 40 Students divided into 2 groups
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Others Nil 2 nos. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 4 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.9m x 0.8m
FUNCTION
Design and Drafting
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Within D&T Area Should not be above 3rd storey Interconnected with Design Room Store Near D&T Studio 2, Main Store and D&T Staff Room Can be converted into other facilities
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
2 nos. 2.1m x 2.1m Mounted and Retractable
20 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Computer Workbench with leg space
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Door to be min. 1.2m (internal) and min. 1.8m (external) wide
Grilles to all windows and vents 1 no. Fire Extinguisher
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 7 nos. 35 nos. Twin Gang (including 20 nos. for 20 students tables) 500 Nil 5 nos. Single Gang
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.4-2
DESIGN ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 200 M2 DESIGN ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Teachers Table Students Table Area Activity Area Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Computer Workbench with leg space Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board LCD Projector Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
3
--
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.5-1
DESIGN ROOM STORE

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 20 M2 STORE FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
m2
20 Area to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY FUNCTION
Storage of equipment, components and students project work Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITYRE
LOCATION
Interconnected with Design Room
Projection Screen (See Vol. 4 1.4) Others
Open Shelves with Drawers High Cabinet with Drawers
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Handles and locks to be provided for drawers and doors of cabinets
Nil
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
OTHERS
Door width to be min. 1.2m Openings for ventilation (with louvers) to be provided above the cabinets
Solid Door
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 1 no. Twin Gang 300 Nil Nil 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.5-2
DESIGN ROOM STORE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF DESIGN ROOM STORE

LEGEND
1. 2.
Open Shelves with Drawers High Cabinet with Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1. 2. --
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
D&T STUDIO STORE

3.6-1
1. Studio Store 2. Main Store
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 40 M2 STORE FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS AREA
Min. 1 per store type
Min. 20 m2 (per Studio Store) Min. 40 m2 (Main Store)
CAPACITY FUNCTION
Storage of D&T supplies Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Others Nil Nil Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Main Store should be on 1st storey and easily accessible from service area Each Studio Store is to be attached to D&T Studios 1 and 2 respectively
High Shelves for Studio Store
Nil
Low Cabinets with Open Shelves for Main Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY SERVICES
--
Master Key Others
Security Alarm
Burglar Alarm (Main Store)
Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 1.2)
OTHERS
Door widths to be min. 1.2m (Studio Store) and min. 1.8m (Main Store)
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock Roller Shutter Grilles to all Windows and Vents
1 no. Fire Extinguisher (Studio Store)
SERVICES/EQUPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang each 1 no. Ceiling Mounted each Nil Nil
300
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.6-2
D&T STUDIO STORE

1. Studio Store 2. Main Store
ALTERNATIVE 1
ALTERNATIVE 2
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FITMENT LAYOUT FOR DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY STUDIO STORE AND MAIN STORE
LEGEND
1.
High Shelves (for Design & Technology Studio Stores) OR Low Cabinet with Open Shelves (for Main Store)
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY 3.7-1
D&T STAFF ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 24 M2 STAFF ROOM FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Min. 24
m2
Floor Wall Ceiling
CAPACITY
6 Staff
Homogeneous Tiles Emulsion Paint
FUNCTION
D&T Staff Office Can explore provisions for multiple usage
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Staff Table Cabinets Others Blinds Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Within D&T Area Near D&T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop, Design Room, Main Store, Timber Store and D&T Switch Room
Projection Screen
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m 6 workstations Low Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
(See Vol. 4 1.4)
Nil
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
OTHERS
Ceiling height to be similar to that of classroom School to decide whether to house the D&T Staff at the main Staff Room or D&T Staff Room
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 7 nos. Twin Gang Nil 6 nos.
500
A/C to be provided with isolator
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
DESIGN & TECHNOLOGY
3.7-2
D&T STAFF ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 D&T STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3.
Staff Tables Area Low Cabinet Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
D&T STUDIO (LS)

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Min. 300 m2 (including 24 m2 store)
FINISHES
CAPACITY
3 Staff Max. 40 students
FUNCTION
Multi-purpose D&T Studio and Store for allgirls school or schools offering D&T education to lower secondary levels only Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Nil 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.2m Sliding Magnetic integrated with High Cabinet 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Integrated Bench Cabinets (See Vol. 4 1.4) 2 nos. 1.4m x 1.2m Sliding integrated with High Cabinet 2 nos. 1.8m x 1.8 Wall Mounted and Retractable 2 nos. 1.9m x 0.8m 22 nos. 1.3m x 0.9m Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Sink Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinet for Soldering Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas points equally distributed) High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board High Cabinet with Drawers Open Shelves with Drawers Storage Closet cum Workstation 1 nos.
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from quiet zones Preferably on the 1st storey and must not be higher than 2nd storey Not to be located below Chemistry Laboratory
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Burglar Alarm Master Key Set D (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock (Store)
Grilles to all Windows and Vents Roller Shutters 3 nos. Fire Extinguishers DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
D&T STUDIO (LS)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 3 nos. 25 nos. 13A 2 nos. 15A 2 nos. Twin Gang (13A) Lighting (Lux) 500 (Teaching Area) 500 (Integrated Bench Area) 300 (Store) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Equipment 18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Studio) 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store) Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 3 nos. 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m Brazing cum Forging Unit 2 nos. 100kg 0.6m x 0.3m Buffing Machine 1 no. Folding Machine 1 no. 240kg 1.0m x 0.8m Power Hacksaw 1 no. Treadle Shears 2 nos. Strip Heater (400W, 240V) 2 nos. Strip Heater (200W, 240V) 4 nos. Scroll Saw 1 no. Fluidiser 1 no. Vacuum Forming Machine 1 no. Oven 1 no. Bandsaw 1 no. Drilling Machine 1 no. Bench Grinder Others 3 nos. Isolator (440V electrical supply) 1 no. Isolator for Exhaust at Gas Forge 5 nos. Gas Points 2 nos. Emergency Stop Station Points DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
D&T STUDIO (LS)
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 300 M2 D&T STUDIO (FOR LOWER SECONDARY CURRICULUM (LS))
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Teaching Area Integrated Benches Storage Closet cum workstation High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board Teachers Table Concrete Counter Cabinets with Sink Open Shelves with Drawers High Cabinet with Drawers Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers
10. Folding Machine 11. Treadle Shears 12. Buffing Machines 13. Power Hacksaw 14. Brazing cum Forging Unit with 2 Gas points on wall 15. Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers (with 3 gas points equally distributed) 16. Magnetic Whiteboard and Projection Screen 17. Emergency Stop Station Point 18. Projector and Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
4 Administrative / Staff
Principals Office 4.2 Vice-Principals Office 4.3 4.1 Counselling Room 4.9 Prefects Room 4.10 4.8
General Office 4.4
Career Guidance Room 4.11
Office Store 4.5
Staff Room 4.12
Printing Room 4.6
Staff Lounge 4.13
H.O.Ds Store 4.7
Staff Resource Room 4.14
Meeting Room
Sick Bay
3
VOL.

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
PRINCIPALS OFFICE
AREA
20 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY
1 Principal 5 Visitors
FUNCTION
Principals work area
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
FITMENT/ FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
Preferably on 1st storey near main entrance Interconnected with Vice-Principals Office and General Office Near Staff Room, Staff Lounge and H.O.Ds Office
Projection Screen
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
Principals Tables Cabinets
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m
1 no. 1.9m x 1.0m
Built-in safe of Chubb Castle Size 2 or Australian Safe Company AS 2002 or Fische Bauche Size 2 or equivalent to be embedded on concrete pedestal Ensure no blind zone in front of the safe Safe to be 850mm above FFL
2 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-seater Sofa set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.5m Side Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-seater Sofa set
1 no. High Cabinet with Built-in safe
Others
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) 1 no. Safe (See Critical Information) Burglar Alarm
Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel
SERVICES/ EQUIPMENT
500
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
PRINCIPALS OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF PRINCIPALS OFFICE

LEGEND
1. Principals Work area 2. Lounge Area (Sofa Set & Side Tables) 3. High Cabinet with Built-in Safe 4. 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 5. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board 7. Magnetic Whiteboard
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12M2 OFFICE FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Non Acoustic Ceiling
NO. OF UNITS
1 per VP
AREA
12 m2 per VP
CAPACITY
1 Staff , 2 Visitors
FUNCTION
Vice-Principals work area
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Table Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. 1.6m x 1.0m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey Accessible through General Office Interconnected with General Office Near Principals Office and HODs Office
Vice-Principals Cabinets Others
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Nil
1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock if access is from outside with Door Closer & Viewing Panel Burglar Alarm
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
500
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF VICE-PRINCIPALS OFFICE
LEGEND
1. Vice-Principals Work area 2. Magnetic Whiteboard 3. Pin-up Board 4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
GENERAL OFFICE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR 78 M2 TYPE FACILITY FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Min. 54 m2 comprising: 1. General Office 2. Administration Managers Workstation (8 m2) 3. Operation Managers Workstation (8 m2) 4. 1 AM/1 OM/2 CSO (Additional 8 m2) 5. Visitors Lounge
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Blinds 1 no. 1.2m x 1.2m Magnetic 5 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m 2 nos. 2-Doors Cupboards
CAPACITY
or
3 Staff + 3 Managers (Administration Manager, AM/Operation Manager, OM) 3 Staff + 2 Managers + 2 Clerical Support Officers (CSO)
Typists Table
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
3 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) Reception Counter 1 no. Keyboard Vol. 4 1.4)
FUNCTION
Others
1 no. Key Deposit Box
For school administration
2 nos. Workstation (1 no. each for AM and OM) (See 1 no. Workstation (for 1 AM) or 2 nos. Workstation (for 2 CSOs) (See Vol. 4 1.4)
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey with clear unobstructed view of main entrance Easily accessible to public Recommended to be in view of Parade Square Interconnected with Principals Office & Printing Room Away from Canteen
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Roller Shutter to be provided at the entrance of the
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
General Office
SERVICES
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 6 nos. (including 1 no. for printer) 1 no. each (AM/OM/CSO) 7 nos. Twin Gang (General Office, including 1 no. for
OTHERS
Key deposit box must be cylindrical & placed within concrete wall beside entrance to General Office and flushed with wall Entrance door to be tempered glass Adjacent FAVE spaces shall be incorporated to provide for future expansion School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provision for individual staff
3 nos. Single Gang (General Office) 2 nos. Twin Gang (AM) Lighting (Lux) Fan Air-Conditioning Communications 500 Nil 1 nos. Twin Gang and 1 nos. Single Gang (OM)
Scanner & 1 no. for Printer)
PA System (General Office) (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Telephone Point (OM)
2 nos. Telephone Points each (General Office/AM)
Water Supply Others
Nil
Control Panel for Bell Timer LED Mimic Panel Photocopier
Lightning Warning System Console DB Closet as required

REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
GENERAL OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 78 M2 OFFICE

LEGEND
1. AM/OM/CSO Area 2. Typists Tables Area 3. Visitors Lounge 4. Reception Counter 5. High Cabinet 6. Photocopier 7. Printer/Scanner Area 8. 2-Doors Cupboards 9. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 10. Magnetic Whiteboard 11. Pin-up Board 12. Fire Alarm Panel 13. PA System 14. Keyboard 15. Key Deposit Box
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
OFFICE STORE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Projection Screen
Open Shelves
6 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm System Control Panel (direct feed from Distribution Board) Burglar Alarm
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
PRINTING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20M2 ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 20 m2
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Projection Screen
Nil
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Windows to face external Door to be min. 1.2m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Nil
Shredder (0.6m x 0.6m), Photocopy Machine, Laminating Machine, Transparency Maker, Photostat Maker, Scanner, Duplicator, Cyclostyling Machine
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 no.
VOL.
H.O.Ds OFFICE
NO. OF UNITS AREA

113 m2 comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (8 m2 <+/- 5%> each) 2. Central area for printer, scanner and copier
FINISHES
CAPACITY
11 Staff 22 Visitors (2 visitors per workstation)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Others Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard Nil
FUNCTION
Heads of Departments office
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st floor Interconnected with General Office, Principals & Vice-Principals Offices
Projection Screen
2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m
11 nos. of Workstations (See Vol. 4 1.4)
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards can be either wall-mounted or free-standing
SERVICES
See Vol. 4 1.4 on requirements for workstation
OTHERS
Main entrance door to H.O.Ds Office to be tempered glass School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
500
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
H.O.Ds OFFICE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 113 M2 H.O.Ds OFFICE
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. H.O.Ds Workstations Printer/Scanner Area Magnetic Whiteboard
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 no.
VOL.
MEETING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS AREA

FINISHES
CAPACITY
26 Staff including: 16 seated at table and 10 backbenchers
FITMENT/FURNITURE
FUNCTION
Weekly staff meeting, various committee meetings, external appraisal visits, etc Can be converted into other facilities
Projection Screen Cabinets Others
LOCATION/ PROXIMITY
Near General Office, Principals & VicePrincipals Offices
18 nos. 0.5m x 0.4m Swivel Chairs
1 no. 4.8m x 1.8m Conference Table
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
1 no. LCD
1 no. Tape Recorder 1 no. OHP DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
MEETING ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 MEETING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Conference Table and Swivel Chairs Area 2. LCD Projector 3. Low Cabinet 4. Pin-up Board 5. Magnetic Whiteboard & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 no.
VOL.
COUNSELLING ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
NO. OF UNITS FINISHES

Floor Wall Ceiling Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint
AREA
CAPACITY
5 persons
FUNCTION
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Blinds Nil Nil
Private area to counsel students and parents Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably on 2nd storey Access from corridor Easily accessible to staff and students There should be sufficient privacy to encourage students requiring counselling to use it Counselling Room should be on the same level as Career Guidance Room, preferably next to each other
Pin-up Board
1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m
1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa Set 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table
1 no. 0.5m x 0.6m 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa Set 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table
10 nos. Pouffes (0.4m in Diameter)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Door with Vision Panel
To ensure privacy, room should have full height walls and not half-partitions
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 1 no. Twin Gang 500 Nil 1 no.
3 nos. Single Gang
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil 1 no. Tape Recorder
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
COUNSELLING ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 COUNSELLING ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Lounge Area (3+1+1 sofa set, side table and coffee table) 3. Pouffes Area 4. Low Cabinet 5. 4-Drawers Filing Cabinet 6. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
PREFECTS ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 25 M2 PREFECTS ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint
CAPACITY
12 Students
FUNCTION
Prefects Meeting and Discussions Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Nil 1 no. 1.5m x 0.9m on castors Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near CCA Room
Pin-up Board Table
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Projection Screen Cabinets
4 nos. 1.4m x 0.8m
1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang
500 Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
PREFECTS ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 25 M2 PREFECTS ROOM

LEGEND
1. Tables Area 2. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 3. Whiteboard on Castors
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.

NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles/Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint
CAPACITY
12 Persons
FUNCTION
Career consultation, advice and exhibition for individual or group Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Blinds 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Career Guidance Room must be on the same storey as Counselling Room Near Counselling Room, H.O.Ds Office and Library
Pin-up Board
Projection Screen Teachers Table Cabinets Computer Table (See Vol. 4 1.4) Others
1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Pin-Up Board
2 nos. 1.3m x 0.8m 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.8m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet Low Cabinet
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
1 no. 0.5m x 0.7m 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 1 no. 3.6m min. length x 0.6m Display Stand 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Coffee Table 2 nos. 0.7m x 0.7m Side Table
SERVICES
--
2 nos. 0.7m x 0.8m 1-Seater Sofa 1 no. 2.0m x 0.8m 3-Seater Sofa
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Nil
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 3 nos. Single Gang
500 Nil
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) Nil DB closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 40 M2 CAREER GUIDANCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Low Cabinet 3. Computer Table 4. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 5. Magnetic Whiteboard 6. 4-Drawer Filing Cabinet 7. Pin-up Board 8. Lounge Area (3+1 Sofa Set, Coffee Table, Side Table) 9. Display Stand 10. 2.1m High Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
STAFF ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 390 M2 STAFF ROOM

Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
390 m2 comprising: 1. Staff workstation area (4 m2 <+/- 5%> each) 2. Common area for printers, scanners, copiers
CAPACITY
73 Staff
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Others Blinds 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
FUNCTION
Teaching staff office
Projection Screen
1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
73 nos. Workstation (See Vol. 4 1.4)
Not higher than 2nd storey and preferably to be on one single storey Preferably Interconnected with Staff Lounge and Staff Resource Room Near General Office, H.O.Ds Office and Office Store
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Entrance Door to be with Jimmy-Proof Lock
FITMENT/FURNITURE
with Door Closer
Staff workstation to be system furniture Whiteboard and Pin-up Boards to be wallmounted
Roller Shutters to be provided at the Entrance
SERVICES
The power points and data points to be recessed into system furniture and located slightly above the worktable See Vol. 4 1.4 on requirements for workstation
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
500
OTHERS
For schools with 36 + 6 classrooms, 78 nos. of workstations to be provided, with space for future 16 nos. additional workstations Consultants are to consult the MOE Officer-inCharge on the possible increase in the number of teachers due to the conduct of special programmes, e.g. GEP, at selected schools School can explore different layouts but must adhere to existing IM guidelines on space provisions for individual staff. Main entrance door to Staff Room be tempered glass
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
STAFF ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 390 M2 STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Workstations Area 2. Common Printer Area 3. Magnetic Whiteboard 4. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
STAFF LOUNGE
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 40 m2
CAPACITY
20 seats
FUNCTION
Relaxation area for staff
FITMENT/FURNITURE
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Not higher than 2nd storey Preferable interconnected with Staff Room Near General Office and H.O.Ds Office
Projection Screen
Low Cabinet with Sink (See Vol. 4 1.4) 20 nos. 0.5m x 0.7m Lounge Sofa
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Solid surfacing material countertop to cabinet with sink
2 nos. 0.8m x 0.6m Coffee Table 1 no. 1.0m x 0.6m Journal Rack
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock & Door
OTHERS
--
Closer
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang Nil
300
PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. Refrigerator
1 no. Hot and Cold Water Dispenser DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
STAFF LOUNGE
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 40 M2 STAFF LOUNGE
LEGEND
1. Lounge Sofa Area 2. Journal Rack 3. Low Cabinet with Sink 4. Refrigerator
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
STAFF RESOURCE ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
FINISHES
AREA
Min. 65 m2
CAPACITY
16 Staff
FUNCTION
Repository for shared teaching materials Preparation of teaching materials Secure place to prepare examination/ assessment questions
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Preferably interconnected with Staff Room
Computer Table (See Vol. 4 1.4)
4 nos. 0.8m x 0.7m
5 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktop with High Cabinet Low Cabinet with Sink 8 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m Double-Sided Bookshelves 2 nos. 0.9m x 0.5m 2-doors Filing Cabinet
Polypropylene and vitreous enamel sink Sink to have swan neck laboratory tap
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 10 nos. Twin Gang 500 Nil 5 nos.
PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) 1 no. Hot/Cold 1 no. Telephone Point
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 65 M2 STAFF RESOURCE ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Teachers Tables Area Book Shelves Area Computer Tables Area 2-door Filing Cabinet Worktop with High Cabinet Low Cabinet with Sink LCD Projector Magnetic Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Retractable Wall Mounted Projection Screen
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.14-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 SICKBAY
SICKBAY
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 20 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY
2 Students
FUNCTION
Resting
Simple first aid treatment
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Tables Cabinets Others Blinds Nil Nil Nil 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 2 nos. 1.8m x 0.9m Folding Single Bed Towel Rail and Mirror 1 no. Soap Dispenser
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Preferably on 1st storey Accessible from General Office for close supervision Preferably interconnected with General Office
FITMENT /FURNITURE
Cater for future air-conditioning Backsplash to be provided for Sink
SERVICES
Power point to be located at table area
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Viewing Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang 300 (Bedhead lights to be provided) 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. 1 no. Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
4.14-2
SICKBAY
SAMPLE LAYOUT 1
SAMPLE LAYOUT 2
SAMPLE LAYOUT 3
ABOVE : SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF 20 M2 SICK BAY
LEGEND
1. Table 2. Folding Single Bed 3. 2-Doors Filing Cabinet 4. Sink 5. Dry Wall Partition 6. 2.1m High Curtains
REV-00 / FEB 06
5 Ancillary
5.1 Media Resource Library 5.2 5.9 Games Equipment Room 5.10
Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room 5.11
NCC/NPCC Room
Furniture Store 5.5
Rifle Range (Indoor) 5.13
5.12
Canteen 5.6
Rifle Range (Outdoor) 5.14
Bookshop 5.7 Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room 5.8
Armoury 5.15 Dental Clinic
Health & Fitness Room
3
1 no. 1. 2. 3. 4.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.1-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
NO. OF UNITS AREA
Min. 450 m2 comprising: Reading / Reference Area (RRA) Instructional Area (IA) (90 m2) Librarians Workroom (LW) (30 m2) Circulation Counter (CC)
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Vinyl Flooring Emulsion Paint Non-Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
120 users seated and standing 2 teacher librarians 10 student librarians 21000 volumes of books
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Teachers Table Computer Table Blinds (All Areas) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.2m Magnetic Whiteboard (IA) 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m (1 no. each at LW and IA) 1 no. 1.8m x 1.8m Wall Mounted and Retractable (IA) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.6m (IA) 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m (LW) 6 nos. 1.4m x 0.7m Double Seat (IA) 7 nos. 0.9m x 0.7m Single Seat (5 nos. at RRA and 2 nos. at LW) Cabinets (See Vol. 4 1.4) 1 no. 3.0m x 0.6m Non-Print Media Cabinet (CC) 1 no. 4.8m x 0.7m Circulation Counter (CC) 13 nos. 2.7m x 0.6m Double-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 10 nos. 1.5m x 0.6m Single-Sided Bookshelves (RRA) 1 no. 0.7m x 0.6m TV/VCR Cabinet (IA) 1 no. 3.8m x 0.7m Open Shelf (LW) 1 no. 0.5m x 0.8m Filing Cabinet (LW) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.5m Steel Cabinet (LW) 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m Book Trolley (CC) 1 no. 0.8m x 0.6m Book Chute (CC) 3 nos. 1.6m x 1.6m Media Island (1 no. at RRA and 2 nos. at IA) 20 nos. 1.6m x 0.9m Reading Tables (RRA) 4 nos. 0.6m x 0.4m x 0.9m Atlas Stand (RRA) 2 nos. 2.6m x 0.7m AV Equipment Worktop (RRA) 5 pcs Sofa Set (RRA) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.3m Newspaper Rack (RRA) 4 nos. 1.0m x 0.4m Periodicals Shelf (single or double sided) (RRA) 1 no. Overhead Projector Trolley (IA) 1 no. 1.2m x 0.7m Copy Machine (LW) 2 nos. 1.2m x 0.6m Worktables (LW)
FUNCTION
Reading and Referencing; Group learning Can explore provision for multiple usage
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Away from noisy area Access preferably on 1st or 2nd storey Do not locate in isolated part of school Interconnected with IA and LW Away from Music Room and Hall/Canteen Can consider other locations if for alternative usage
FITMENT/FURNITURE
adjustable
All fitment shelves to be removable and
Others
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.1-2

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY
SERVICES
TV point in Reading Reference Area to be located near AV Equipment Worktop
OTHERS
Connecting door to Librarians Workroom to be near the counter Min. 2 nos. direct access doorways from corridor to be provided Direct access and visual connection to be provided from Media Resource Library (MRL) to Librarians Workroom and Instructional Area where necessary Book drop/chute to allow return of books from outside the MRL to be provided Reading tables and Periodicals display shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to window openings Book shelves to be arranged perpendicularly to Circulation Counter for easy supervision tempered and sandblasted Glass doors and screens (if provided) to be Half height glass partition for visual access to be provided to Instructional Area and Librarians Workroom All windows to have locks
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Roller Shutters to be provided at the entrance of MRL
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports 8 nos. + 3 nos. at Counter Area (RRA) 13 nos. (IA) 2 nos. (LW) Power Points 6 nos. Single Gang, 8 nos. Twin Gang, 3 nos. Twin Gang at Counter Area (RRA) 16 nos. Twin Gang, 1 no. Single Gang for LCD (IA) 4 nos. Twin Gang (LW) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications 500 Nil A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point at Counter (RRA) 1 no. Telephone Point (LW) Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. TV (1 no. each at RRA and IA) 1 no. LCD (LW) DB Closet as required
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.1-3
SAMPLE LAYOUT FOR A 450 M2 MEDIA RESOURCE LIBRARY

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Open Shelves Single Seat Computer Table Area Worktable Area Teachers Table Filing Cabinet, Steel Cabinet & Copy Machine Pin-up Board Circulation Counter Book Chute Non-print Media Cabinet 13. Single-sided Bookshelves 14. Newspaper Rack 15. AV Equipment Worktop 16. 5 piece Sofa set 17. Media Island 18. Atlas Stand & Periodical Shelves 19. Double-sided Bookshelves 20. Double seat Computer Table Area 21. LCD Projector 22. TV/VCR Cabinet 23. Whiteboard, Pin-up Board & Projection Screen 24. OHP Trolley
10. Book Trolley 11. Double Carrel Drawing 12. Reading Table Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.1-4
EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY BOOK SHELVES
EXAMPLE OF LIBRARY / REFERENCE AREAS
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1no.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.2-1
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
RECOMMENDED PROVISION FOR A 1177 M2 MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
(1070 M2 TO INCLUDE STAGE, CONTROL ROOM AND CHANGING ROOM)
NO. OF UNITS
AREA
FINISHES SEATING AREA AND STAGE

m2
Min. 990 ( for Seating Area including 3 badminton courts) Min. 30 m2 (for Stage Area) A full performance Stage must be provided in the school. If this is not provided in the Hall, a minimum basic stage (30 m2) shall be provided.
Floor Wall Ceiling
T&G Timber Strips Emulsion Paint (Seating Area) / Acoustic wall treatment (Rear of Hall) Suspended Acoustic Ceiling
CAPACITY
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Others Fire Retardant Motorized Stage Curtain (Stage) Nil Nil 1 no. 4.88m x 4.88m Wall Mounted Motorized 2 nos. Wall Climbing Rack Manually Operated Flybar on Stage
To provide for maximum student enrolment and teaching staff
FUNCTION
For school assembly, talks, concert, school examination and sports like badminton, gymnastics, aerobics, etc. Can explore provision for multiple usages
Projection Screen
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On ground or 2nd storey Directly accessible from the main entrance of the school Should be adjacent to the Playfield and Outdoor Courts Preferably interconnected with Furniture Store
SAFETY/SECURITY
2 nos. minimum Hosereels 5 nos. Fire Extinguisher
FITMENT/FURNITURE
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 1 no. (Stage) 1 no. for every Column (Seating Area)
Projection screen should be positioned so that it is highly visible to all students in the Seating Area School crest to be provided above the stage
4 nos. (Stage) Area)
4 nos. 13A Twin Gang Power Points (Seating Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications 300/500 (Seating Area) 300 (Stage) Wall Mounted at 3-4.5m C/C
SERVICES
Row switching control for high bay lighting Microphone point position should be at same line as curtain line (if full performance stage is provided)
4 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Stage) Nil Sound Reinforcement System (Seating Area)
OTHERS
Steps to be provided at front of the stage Door into Hall to be min. 1.5m wide The number and location of access doors should ensure efficient circulation and discharge of students All openings should be adjustable to cater for varying ventilation and lighting requirements These openings should be operable from a service platform or corridor Badminton Area to have a min. clear height of 7.6m Control Room is to be linked at upper rear of the Hall
Intercom System (connecting Stage and Control Room) 2 nos. Telephone Points (Stage) Exit Light at every Exit
Water Supply Others
Nil
Isolator for Stage Lighting Stage Lighting System 2 nos. Battery Operated Clock
4 nos. Microphone Points (Seating Area)
3 nos. Microphone Points (Front part of Stage) 3 nos. Microphone Points (Behind Stage Area) DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.2-2
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
Plan
Section A-A
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE (IF PROVIDED WITHIN HALL)
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF BADMINTON COURTS
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.2-3
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR EXAMINATIONS
Section
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS FOR ASSEMBLY
WALL CLIMBING RACK FOR SECONDARY SCHOOLS
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
ANCILLARY
NO. OF UNITS
1. Control Room (1 no.) 2. Stage (Min. 1 no. basic) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1)
5.3-1
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS
FINISHES
Floor Wall Concrete Topping (Control Room, Store) Non-Slip Tiles (Changing Room) Emulsion Paint (Control Room, Store) Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m Height (Changing Room) Glazing (Control Room) Ceiling Non-Acoustic Ceiling (Control Room) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab (Changing Room, Store)
AREA
1. Control Room (8 m2 exclusive of Hall area) 2. Stage (Min. 30 m2 included within Hall area) 3. Changing Room + Store (As required within Hall area)
CAPACITY
1. Control Room (3 persons maximum) 2. Stage (To provide appropriate capacity for either basic stage or full performance stage) 3. Changing Room + Store (Min. 1 person)
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinet Others To provide (Dressing Area) Nil 1 no. 1.4m x 1.2m (Control Room) 2 nos. Dressing Tables with Wall Mirrors 1 no. Stage Light Control Desk (Control Room) 1 no. Sound Reinforcement System Housing Rack (Control Room)
FUNCTION
1. 2.
Control Room: To control the sound and lighting systems Changing Room: To provide toilet & dressing facilities for performers & stage crew only; Store: For storage of badminton posts, vaulting horses (2 nos.), landing mats (20 nos.), crash mats and trampoline
3.
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
1.
Control Room: At the rear of the hall and at least 3.6m above the Seating Area with unobstructed view of the Stage
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm (Control Room) Nil
2.
Changing Room: Easily accessible from the stage but ensure that noise in the Changing Room is not transmitted to the Stage and Seating Area Store: Directly accessible from Seating Area
3.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 4 nos. Single Gang (Control Room) 4 nos. Twin Gang (Changing Room) 1 no. Single Gang (Store) Lighting (Lux) 300 1 no. Wall Mounted (Control Room, Store) 1 no. Ceiling Mounted (Changing Room) per room AirConditioning Communicatio ns Water Supply Others Nil Intercom System (1 no. connecting Stage and Control Room) No. of taps to comply with latest statutory requirement 2 nos. Exhaust Fans (1 no. per Changing Room) Fans
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
To allow table/ cabinet for equipment in Control Room To provide door at back of stage for performers to enter and exit Changing Room to include min. 1 wash basin and 1 changing area
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
MULTI-PURPOSE HALL
ANCILLARY 5.3-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 8 M2 CONTROL ROOM

LEGEND
1. Stage Layout Control Desk 2. Sound Reinforcement System Equipment Housing Rack
PHOTO OF HALL AND FULL PERFORMANCE STAGE
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.4-1
FURNITURE STORE
FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
Storing of furniture Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil Nil Nil Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Multi-Purpose Hall Preferably interconnected with Multi-Purpose Hall
Projection Screen
FITMENT/FURNITURE -SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2)
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
300
Nil
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1. 2. 3. 4.
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.5-1
CANTEEN
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogenous Non-Slip Tiles Concrete Topping (Store) Glazed Ceramic Tile to minimum 2.2m height Emulsion Paint (Store) Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Total Canteen areas to be minimum 700 m2 Each Canteen area to comprise of: Refreshment / Seating Area Food Stalls Central Wash Area Stores and toilets
CAPACITY
Total Canteen Areas to provide for maximum student enrolment over a maximum of 2 recess periods
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Foodstalls Tables Seating Benches Worktop 8 nos. including 2 nos. drinks stall 52 nos. 1.8m x 0.6m 104 nos. 1.8m x 0.3m 1 no. Food Preparation top per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) 2.1m wide serving counter per stall (total of 8 Foodstalls) Wash Troughs 2 nos. Wash Troughs for Toothbrushing drills (with 5 tap points each) 1 no. Wash Sink per stall 3 nos. Dishwashing Trough Others 16 nos. Lockers (2 nos. per Foodstall)
FUNCTION
For preparation, serving, consumption of meals
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near Field and Playcourts
First storey accessible by vehicle for goods delivery Away from General Office and Teaching areas
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Soap dispenser at students wash trough to be provided
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) See Vol. 4 2.3 2 nos. minimum of Hosereels (See Vol. 4 1.2) 4 nos. of Fire Extinguisher
OTHERS
Sufficient clearance outside of the Refreshment /seating area to be provided for queuing at food stalls Finishes for serving counter, stall worktop & fixtures to be stainless steel Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium Separate meters for gas, water and electrical for each stall Bottle Store to be minimum 2.4m wide Central Wash area to provide separate washing trough for Muslim and non-Muslim stalls Lockable taps connected to separate meters to be provided at wash areas
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points As required 8 nos. (Refreshment Area) 24 nos. (3 nos. per stall) 1 no. (Store) Lighting (Lux) Fans 300 18 nos. Ceiling Mounted (Refreshment Area) 1 no. Wall Mounted per stall 1 no. Wall Mounted (Store) Communications PA System (Refreshment Area)(See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 Microphone Point 2 nos. Telephone Points (Public Phones) Water Supply 10 nos. (Wash Trough) 2 nos. (Water Cooler) 8 nos. (Foodstall) 8 nos. (Central Wash Area) Others Minimum 8 nos. Gas points (Foodstall) Hood & Flue over cooking range at food stalls Isolator for Mechanical Ventilation Exhaust Fans 2 nos. Water Coolers Minimum 2 nos. Vending Machines
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.5-2
CANTEEN
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 700 M2 CANTEEN

LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Long Table & Bench Food Stalls Canteen Store/ Toilets/ Central Wash Area/ Bottle Store Wash Trough for Tooth-brushing Water Cooler Vending Machines Public Telephones
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.5-3
CANTEEN
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF FOOD STALL / DRINK STALL
TYPICAL ELEVATION OF FOODSTALL FITMENT
RECOMMENDED CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL WASH TROUGH
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.6-1
BOOKSHOP
NO. OF UNITS
Min. 1
AREA
Min. 12 m
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles / Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
CAPACITY
1 2 Staff
FUNCTION
For sale of books and stationery Can explore provisions for multiple usages
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Must be on 1st Storey Near Canteen Away from Classrooms and Staff Area
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Cabinets Nil Nil Nil Nil Counter Cabinet High Open Shelves
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Counter cabinet should not be higher than 750mm high
SERVICES
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Grilles to all Windows, Vents & Counters Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher
OTHERS
Grilles (if any) for the counter should be fixed on the external side of the roller shutter Roller shutter to be minimum 1.8m wide
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 2 nos. Single Gang 500 1 no. Ceiling Mounted Nil 1 no. of Telephone Point Nil DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.6-2
BOOKSHOP
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 BOOKSHOP

LEGEND
1. Counter Cabinet 2. High Open Shelves Area
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
NON-TEACHING STAFF
ANCILLARY 5.7-1
(NTS) ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
10 m2
FINISHES
CAPACITY
4 persons
FUNCTION
Resting room for executive & administrative staff, including all Division 1-4 officers Can explore provisions for multiple usages
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Near Principals Office and General Office
Projection Screen DB Closet
SERVICES
--
1 no. 0.9m x 0.3m
High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4)
OTHERS
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Nil Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2)
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Twin Gang 1 no. of Ceiling Mounted Nil Nil
300
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
NON-TEACHING STAFF
ANCILLARY 5.7-2
(NTS) ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 10 M2 NON-TEACHING STAFF ROOM
LEGEND
1. Dining Table & Chairs Area 2. High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
72
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.8-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 HEALTH & FITNESS ROOM FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Sports Flooring or Homogeneous Vinyl Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
Area is School White Area (SWA) m2
CAPACITY
1 Staff 20 Students
FUNCTION
Activities include mainly weight training exercises, aerobic type exercises & TV/video presentations Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 1 no. 4.0 m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Away from quiet areas Preferably on 1st storey
2 nos. 2.4m x 1.2m 1 no. 1.2m x 0.8m
Accessible after school hours without having to pass through other controlled areas
1 no. full length mirror with timber bar 3 nos. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle 2 nos. Exercise Bench 1 no. Weights Rack
Near Field, Games Equipment Store and CCA Room
1 no. Multi-Station Exercise Machine 1 no. Assisted Pull-Up
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Full length mirror to be mounted 1.5 m high x 6 mm thick on plywood backing with aluminium trimming & mounted 300 mm above floor level
SERVICES
SAFETY/SECURITY
Fans to be wall mounted at min. 2.5m above floor level
OTHERS
Min. clear distance between any equipment or between equipment and wall is 0.5m
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) 1 no. 300 3 nos. Twin Gang 4 nos. Wall Mounted at 2.5m min. from floor level Nil
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.8-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF 72 M2 HEALTH FITNESS ROOM
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board 3. Weights Rack 4. Exercise Bench Area 5. Multi-Station Exercise Machine 6. Assisted Pull-up 7. Exercise Ergometer Bicycle 8. Low Cabinet 9. Mirror
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
3
--
ANCILLARY
5.9-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 72 M2 STORE FINISHES
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
CAPACITY FUNCTION FITMENT/FURNITURE

Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Cabinets Nil Nil
Storage of equipment for physical education/games Can be converted into other facilities
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
1st storey Near Playcourts, Field, Canteen and Changing Room
Teachers Table
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m
1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m High Open Shelves
High Cabinet (See Vol. 4 1.4) 3 nos. Aluminium Cages for balls
FITMENT/FURNITURE
High Cabinets to store : knee guards, ankle guards, stopwatches, measuring tapes, tape recorder, megaphone, shuttlecocks, table tennis balls, football boots, stockings and jerseys High Open Shelves to store : hoops, skipping ropes, starter blocks, shot puts, discuses, swimming floats, hockey sticks, abdominal guards and goalkeepers pads, softballs, gloves and masks, softball bases, pitcher and plates, body protectors, table tennis bats, sepak takraw balls, athletes batons
SAFETY/SECURITY
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang 300 Nil 1 no. Ceiling Mounted
SERVICES OTHERS
Power point to be located near Teachers Table
Nil
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.9-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 72 M2 GAMES EQUIPMENT STORE
LEGEND
1. Teachers Table 2. High Cabinet 3. High Open Shelves 4. Aluminium Cages 5. Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.10-1
CCA ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
4 nos.
AREA
24 m2 per unit Total of 96 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
FINISHES
CAPACITY
--
FUNCTION
For uniformed groups, indoor games, CCA clubs & activities Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Nil 1 no. 3.6m x 1.2m Magnetic 1 no. at back to cover minimum 30% of rear wall length 2 nos. 1.2m x 1.2m in front Projection Screen Teachers Table Students Table Cabinets Nil 1 no. 1.3m x 0.8m 16 nos. 0.6m x 0.6m 2 nos. 1.0m x 0.5m 2-Doors Filing Cabinets
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Away from quiet areas Preferably on 1st storey Preferably grouped together
Accessible after school hours without the necessity to pass other areas
Near Field and Games Equipment Store
FITMENT/FURNITURE
2 nos. of pin-up board to flank Whiteboard
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock with Vision Panel if on 1st storey
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
--
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 1 no. 1 no. Single Gang 2 nos. Twin Gang 300 2 nos. Ceiling Mounted Nil PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 1 no. of Telephone Point Nil DB Closet as required
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.10-2
CCA ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 24 M2 CCA ROOM
LEGEND
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Teachers Table Students Table Area Filing Cabinet Pin-up Board Magnetic Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.11-1
NCC/NPCC ROOM
NO. OF UNITS
2 Nos.
AREA
24 m2 per unit
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Homogeneous Tiles/ Ceramic Tiles Emulsion Paint Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
Total of 48 m2 to be School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
Maximum 16 persons (Staff and Students)
FUNCTION
CCA activities for NCC/NPCC Can be converted to other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Others Nil 1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Magnetic Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Preferably at the lower storeys and not in the basement Near Rifle Range, Armoury and CCA Room
Projection Screen
1 no. 2.4m x 1.2m Nil
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Nil Master Key Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2) Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock and Vision
SERVICES
--
OTHERS
Ceiling height to be similar to that of Classroom
Panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 5 nos. Single Gang 2 nos. of Ceiling Mounted Nil 1 no.
500
Nil
REV-00 / FEB 06
5 Ancillary
5.1 Media Resource Library 5.2 5.9 Games Equipment Room 5.10
Co-Curricular Activities (CCA) Room 5.11
NCC/NPCC Room
Furniture Store 5.5
Rifle Range (Indoor) 5.13
5.12
Canteen 5.6
Rifle Range (Outdoor) 5.14
Bookshop 5.7 Non-Teaching Staff (NTS) Room 5.8
Armoury 5.15 Dental Clinic
Health & Fitness Room
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.12-1
RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
208 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Min. 12.5mm Vermiculite Textured or Spray Vermiculite Textured Spray Finish Finish
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
40 Students
2 Supervisors (Staff) 10 nos. targets
FUNCTION
Rifle shooting practice
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Others Pin-up Board Nil Nil Flag Holders Nil
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Direct access from corridor
Preferably sheltered above Design & Technology Block Interconnected with Armoury Near NCC/NPCC Room Can be converted into other facilities
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers (Emergency Exit) Heavy Duty Magnetic Door Contacts
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Table support for target carriage conveyor should be bolted to the ground Table support should be made of wood or metal Table top to be a min. thickness of 38mm thick, tongue and groove wood edging Motorised type target conveyor system to be used 1 no. Flag holder to be placed outside each entrance
Solid Door/ Outward opening Panic Bolt Lockset
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 1 no. (each conveyor belt) 4 nos. (General usage) 300 (Firers Zone) 500 (Range) Fans
SERVICES
Unless otherwise specified, services (including ventilation duct work) should not be located within the firers zone, range and armoury Any electrical cabling within the range to be contained within galvanized iron conduit and run behind the firers zone Spacing between targets indicated are absolute min. values Targets zone to be evenly illuminated The range must be sufficiently bright for shooting (to match International Shooting Sport Federation (ISSF) requirements of min. 300 lux).
Lighting (Lux)
300 (Working Zone)
1500 (Targets zone) Nil
4 nos. Wall Mounted
1 no. Firing in Progress Lighting Sign Box to each entrance/ exit to range
OTHERS
Openings are only allowed on back wall of the working zone Back wall to be min. 200mm Solid Concrete Wall with Concrete Vent Block Door location and operation to comply with FSSD and ISD requirements Rifle Range to be column free
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.12-2
RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)
SAMPLE OF A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF RIFLE RANGE (INDOOR)

LEGEND
A
Min. 1500 Lux at Target area Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to protect light to protect lighting Approved Masterboard Baffle Board to prevent shooting into ceiling and
B1 & B2 Min. 300 Lux P1 P2 P3
Approved Treated Hardwood Timber Board. Board (600 x 600 x 40mm thick) to be wall mounted behind the target and centered on the target
Note: All screws fixing to be sunken stainless steel with appropriate plug cover
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.13-1
RIFLE RANGE (OUTDOOR)

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 208 M2 RIFLE RANGE
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
208 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping Minimum 200mm Solid Concrete Wall, no finish required. Concrete Vent Block to back wall only Masterboard
Area is School White Area (SWA)
CAPACITY
40 Students
2 Supervisors (Staff) 10 nos. targets
FUNCTION
Rifle shooting Practice Can be converted into other facilities
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Others Pin-up Board Nil Nil Nil 1 no. Flag Holder outside each entrance
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Outdoor Open range on ground Interconnected with Armoury Near NCC/NPCC Room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Others Security System Heavy Duty Magnetic Door Contacts (Emergency Exit) Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2)
Table support for target carriage conveyor should be bolted to the ground Table support should be made of concrete or masonry Table top to be a min. thickness of 50mm concrete, sealed to protect the surface and finished with a rounded edge. Cranked type target conveyor system to be used
Solid Door/ Outward opening Panic Bolt Lockset 2 nos. Fire Extinguishers
SERVICES
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 4 nos. Single Gang (General usage) 4 nos. of Wall Mounted Nil
Unless otherwise specified, services should not be located within the firers zone, range and armoury Any electrical cabling within the range to be contained within galvanized iron conduit and run behind the firers zone Spacing between targets indicated are absolute minimum values
300 (Working Zone and Firers Zone)
PA System (See Vol. 4 to 2.3) Nil 1 no. Telephone Point
OTHERS
1 no. Firing in Progress Lighting Sign Box to each entrance/ exit to range
Openings only allowed on back wall Door location and operation to comply with FSSD and ISD requirements Rifle Range to be column free All roof structure to be above the ceiling
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.14-1
ARMOURY
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 20 M2 ARMOURY
NO. OF UNITS
1 no.
AREA
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Concrete Topping At least one block thick wall or concrete wall Separate concrete ceiling by itself with emulsion paint with emulsion paint finish
CAPACITY
1 Staff 160 Rifles for Practices (Open Rack) 48 Rifles for Competition (Closed Rack)
FUNCTION
Storage of air rifles and pellets
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Cabinets Pin-up Board Nil Nil Nil Rifle Rack
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Near NPCC/NCC Room
Preferably interconnected with Rifle Range
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
Open Rifle Rack
SERVICES
Strobe light cum siren box should be mounted outside the Armoury wall visible from main road or access road No overhead pipes/ other services should cross inside the Armoury room
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Control Panel/Infra Red Sensor Detector/ Heavy 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Duty Magnetic Door Contact Masterkey Set B (See Vol. 4 1.2)
OTHERS
6mm thick MS Door/ Chubbs Battleship 1K11 Close Shackled padlocks
Door to meet ISD requirements Door to swing inwards and fitted with padlock bar Hercules Chubb Ventilation grilles for openings in walls to be 25mm diameter thick Mild Steel bars spaced at 50mm centre to centre Ventilation opening should not exceed 200mm in height For Armoury within Rifle Range, the door should be protected with separate timber framed door with acoustic panel
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Fans Lighting (Lux) Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others Nil 1 no. Single Gang 1 no. Wall Mounted Nil Nil
300
Nil
1 no. Dehumidifier
Security light to be provided at entrance
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.14-2
ARMOURY
Alternative 1
Alternative 2
SAMPLE LAYOUTS OF ARMOURY
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.14-3
ARMOURY
PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM
PHOTO OF ARMOURY ROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.15-1
DENTAL CLINIC
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
NO. OF UNITS
As required
AREA
42 m2
FINISHES
Floor Non-Slip Tiles (Dental Clinic) 100mm thk Concrete Plinth (Compressor Compartment) Wall Glazed Wall Tiles to Full Height (Dental Clinic) 100mm thick Brickwall with Glazed Wall Tiles Internally (Compressor Compartment) Ceiling Suspended Ceiling (Dental Clinic) Emulsion Paint (Compressor Compartment)
CAPACITY
2 Students
2 Dental Therapists and 1 Dentist
FUNCTION
For carrying out dental health services
LOCATION/PROXIMITY
On 1st storey Away from Classrooms
FITMENT/FURNITURE
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Curtain Whiteboard Pin-up Board Projection Screen Cabinets (See Vol. 4 1.4) Others Blinds (Dental Clinic) 1 no. 1.0m x 0.7m Magnetic Nil Nil Long Cabinet with Sinks High Cabinet Waiting Bench Worktable
All drawers and cupboards of cabinets and writing tables shall have locksets and handles Long cabinets with sinks shall have solid surfacing worktop Sinks to be stainless steel of size 0.4m (L) x 0.4m(W) x 0.2m(D) Each sink to have individual water stop cock, swivel swan neck tap with lever elbow handle Wash hand basin to have elbow tap, water stop cock, paper towel dispenser, soap dispenser Wall hung cabinet shall not have glass panel but to have 1 adjustable shelf within
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Master Key Set A (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm Grilles to all Windows and Vents Security Grille Gate at entrance to be lockable from both inside and outside Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock, Vision Panel and Door Closer
SERVICES
a. b. c.
Compressor Compartment: shall have a clear height of 2200mm light switch shall be located outside the compartment for easy reach control switch to the compressor shall be located outside the compressor compartment but within the clinic Door to compartment to be 1.15m x 2.2m high solid timber double-leaf door, louvered at lower half and with lockset shall have 1 light fitting The 7 nos. of utility pipes must be within 160mm diameter Provide filter at incoming water pipes to the 2 dental chairs Isolated electrical wall switch & water stop cock for each unit Control switch for dental unit shall be located on wall of surgery and shall have a red light indicator
d.
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points 5 nos. (including 3 nos. at Worktable and 1 no. 6 nos. Twin Gang and 1 no. Single Gang (Dental Clinic) 1 no. Twin Gang (Compressor Compartment) Nil for each Dental chair)
e. a. b. c. d.
Dental Unit:
See critical information for details A/C to be provided with Isolator PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 3 nos. Cold (Dental Clinic)
2 nos. Telephone Points at Worktable
Clinic to have 6 sets of light fittings with 2 fluorescent tubes each. 3 sets of these lights to be connected to one switch. DB with Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker to be provided in the Clinic.
Nil
OTHERS
Windows shall be sliding type with top hung. No fixed glass windows are allowed
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.15-2
DENTAL CLINIC
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 42 M2 DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Dental Units 2. Long Cabinet with Sinks 3. Worktable 4. Space for Autosonic Cleanser 5. Space for Autoclave 6. Waiting Area 7. High Cabinet 8. Waiting Bench 9. LAN points, Telephone Points & Magnetic Whiteboard
WSC PTD SD
Water Stop Cock Paper Towel Dispenser Soap Dispenser
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ANCILLARY
5.15-3
DENTAL CLINIC
LEGEND
1. Drain Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Drainage connection is 30mm above floor gradient at least 1:100 2. Electrical Core 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Cord free & 1000mm above floor 230V, 50Hz, 13A Automatic Circuit Breaker C16 Control switch to be mounted on the wall of the surgery for turning on the main power supply 3. Vacuum Connection 40mm (internal diameter) PVC pipe Vacuum connection is 30mm above floor The Suction pipe will lead to the suction machine (located in the compressor compartment) 4. Suction Control Cable wire (3 x 1.5 sq mm) Electric Control Cable free & 1000mm above floor 5. Compressed Air Connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure Between 5.2 - 7.5 Bar Free from oil & Contamination 6. Water connection 15mm (outer diameter) copper pipe finish with BSPF 1/2 Connector Water Connection is 50mm above floor Pressure between 2.5 6 bar 7. Cable Connection 20 mm diameter with minimum 3m length LANs cable/terminated with faceplate at the end of 3m for future connection to chair side computer 5 Microns water filtration (if possible) 20mm diameter Electrical conduit with 3 core
TEMPLATE OF JUNCTION BOX FOR DENTAL UNIT
REV-00 / FEB 06
6 Services & Circulation

6.1
Toilets 6.2
LAN Room 6.3
Central Server Room 6.4
FAVE Area
3
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
6.1-1
TOILETS
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TOILET UNIT FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Non-Slip Tiles Wall Tiles up to 2.2m high only Emulsion Paint to Soffit of Slab
NO. OF UNITS
As required
AREA
As required
CAPACITY
For every 40 students (male), to provide: 1 WC, 2 urinals (including 1 floor urinal) & 1 washbasin For every 40 students (female), to provide: 3 WCs & 2 washbasins If the actual ratio of male to female students in the school is not available, and if school has no preference, consultants can assume 50% male and 50% female. The provisions prescribed above represent the minimum only. For schools with layouts resulting in longer distances between blocks, consultants shall ensure a good distribution of toilets and provide the appropriate no. of WCs across the school. A total of 12 centralized shower cubicles (6 male and 6 female) and adequate changing space to be provided for students. A total of 2 shower cubicles (1 male, 1 female) to be provided for staff.
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Soap Dispenser Cleansing Tap 1 no. for every two basins 1 no. to be provided to at least one toilet cubicle
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master key Security System Others Key Alike to all Toilets (where main doors are provided) (See Vol. 4 1.2) Nil Nil
FUNCTION
Showering, changing, toilets needs
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Nil 1 no. 15 A for Hand Dryer Isolator for mechanical ventilation 1 no. for Fan
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Toilets shall not be located at remote areas within the school, especially female toilets. Staff toilets to be near Staff and Administration as well as Teaching areas. Centralized showers for students should be near the school field, preferably at the Canteen area. Shower cubicles to be housed separately from WCs in toilet. Basic facilities for the disabled to be provided in all schools to include: one handicapped toilet for the wheelchair-bound at the 1st storey each at the Canteen, Administration areas and in at least one Classroom block; one WC for the ambulant disabled at every level above the 1st storey at the Administrative area and in at least one Classroom block. 4 nos. water coolers to be distributed outside toilet
300 1 no. Wall Mounted Nil Nil 1 no. Bib Tap in each Squatting Pan Cubicle 13A Power Points for Handicapped Toilets Ducted Mechanical Ventilation System for Toilet Stack Extractor Fan for individual toilet. 1 no. Electric Hand Dryer Sensor Flush Valves to be provided in all Handicapped Toilet Cubicles 7 nos. Water Coolers
clusters at every level of the Classroom blocks, 2 nos. at the Canteen and 1 no. outside the Administrative /General Office area.
FITMENT /FURNITURE
The sanitary appliances and fittings installed shall be of heavy-duty classification and quality. All fitment including pedestal WC and wash hand basin to be installed at heights that cater to average height students as well as smaller lower primary students. At least 1 squat pan WC with a bib tap shall be provided per toilet.
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
6.1-2
TOILETS
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS OF TOILET FTTINGS
FITMENT /FURNITURE (CONT)

Urinal flush/sensor should be 950mm above finished floor level (F.F.L).Wash hand basin to be under-counter type, designed to minimize water spilling over from basin onto the counter. Vanity tops to be solid-surfacing finish or cultured marble. All wash basin taps shall have their water pressure and flow rate adjusted to minimize splashing. Self-closing delayed action taps to be provided, with large surface area for easy palm-pressing. Soap dispenser to have a transparent window to show the remaining level of liquid soap clearly. Proprietary system partitions to be provided for toilet cubicles. Drum type of tissue holder to be provided in each toilet cubicle. Hand dryer to be appropriately mounted to prevent hot air from blowing on the face of shorter students.
PEDESTAL TYPE
SERVICES
Toilet stack served by ducted mechanical ventilation system should have central exhaust fans located at roof level. Individual toilets should be served by wall mounted exhaust fans. Ensure that extracted air from toilet is not directed at other habitable or main circulation areas. Foul air extraction to be at low level close to source. Low capacity flushing cisterns to be provided for all water closets. Individual control valves to be provided for urinal flush valves and low capacity flushing cisterns.
SQUAT PAN TYPE
OTHERS
Main entrance to the toilets shall be positioned to ensure sufficient visual privacy for the users inside the toilet. Toilet walls to be finished with smooth wall tiles or other impervious materials. Storage closet of minimum 1.0m x 0.6m to be provided for every cluster of toilets on all floors to store cleaning equipment and mop sink at low height. Handicapped toilet provisions to comply with the latest statutory Code on Barrier-Free Accessibility in Buildings. Squat pan WC cubicle to be kerbed to prevent water from flowing outside the cubicle and its floor to be graded towards gully trap within cubicle. Gully/Floor trap covers to be made of stainless steel.
URINAL
WASH BASIN
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
---
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
NO. OF UNITS
As required
6.2-1
LAN ROOM
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM
AREA
7.5 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Calcium Silicate or Cement Board with Insulation on Inner Wall Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
CAPACITY FUNCTION LOCATION/PROXIMITY
Located at central block and must not be more than 90m from the furthest data outlet that it is serving
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Racks (by others) 3 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.8m x 2.2m high
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. of Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
FCU = 2 Heatload = 3.9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS
LAN Riser shall be located outside the LAN Room facing internal and on all floors Room height to be min. 2.7m Max. weight allowed: 1,500kg No windows allowed No viewing panel on door No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the LAN Room All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the LAN Room
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 4 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 2 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided PA System (See Vol. 4 - 2.3) Nil Heat and Smoke detectors
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
CIRCULATION
SERVICES &
6.2-2
LAN ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 7.5 M2 LAN ROOM

LEGEND
1. Rack 2. Air-conditioning Fan Coil Units (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted Lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 No. --
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
6.3-1
CENTRAL SERVER ROOM

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
NO. OF UNITS AREA
Min. 12.6 m2
FINISHES
Floor Wall Ceiling Thick Heavy Duty Anti-Static Vinyl Calcium Silicate or Cement Insulation on Inner Wall Board with
CAPACITY FUNCTION
--
Thermally Insulated Ceiling Membrane/ Board
LOCATION /PROXIMITY
Located at 1st storey and preferably nearby to the General Office Must be nearby telephone equipment room and coaxial distribution room
FITMENT/FURNITURE
Rack 5 nos. (maximum) 0.8m x 0.6m x 2.2m high
FITMENT/FURNITURE
--
SAFETY/SECURITY
Master Key Security System Others Individual Key (See Vol. 4 1.2) Burglar Alarm 1 no. Fire Extinguisher Air Tight Solid Door with Jimmy-Proof Lock
SERVICES
FCU = 4 Heat Load = 9KW Cooling capacity of each FCU = 5.8KW Indoor temperature = 23 + 1oC R.H. = 60% + 5%
OTHERS
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Computer Ports Power Points Nil 5 nos. Twin Gang (Computer) 4 nos. Single Gang (FCU) 1 no. Single Gang (PLC) Lighting (Lux) Fans Air-Conditioning Communications Water Supply Others 500 Nil 24 hr Air-Conditioning to be provided PA System (See Vol. 4 2.3) 2 nos. of Telephone Points Nil Heat and Smoke Detector
The size of the central server room is 4.2m x 3.0m (min. internal clearance) Room height to be min. 2.7m Max. weight allowed: 1,800kg No window allowed No viewing panel allowed on door No toilet, planter box or gas pipes shall be allowed to run above or inside the Server Room All openings to be sealed or airtight To provide 100mm high concrete kerb at the door opening Grounding strip to be located at the same level and near to the power point For schools under upgrading, no riser access and no high tension electrical switchboard in the Server Room
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
6.3-2
CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF A 12.6 M2 CENTRAL SERVER ROOM
LEGEND
1. Rack 2. Air-con Fan Coils (2.2m from finished floor level) 3. Wall mounted lights (1.8m from finished floor level) 4. Wall mounted DB (1.8m from finished floor level)
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
SERVICES &
CIRCULATION
6.4-1
FAVE AREA
AREA
10% of schools circulation area (approximately 1110 m2 to be made available for FAVE space.
Before expansion
Corridor Study Corner FAVE space
LOCATION
Preferably sited near Administration areas like General Office, Staff Room or Canteen and other areas that support teaching and learning.
FUNCTION
To provide space for schools future expansion or modification of existing facilities. Circulation area can be used as Study Area before it is carved out to form the expanded space or the modified area of an existing facility.
Staircase
Room Space
Room Space
OTHERS
If Classrooms need to be reconverted into 38 nos. 90 m2 modules, FAVE area can be used.
After expansion
Corridor
Staircase
Study
Corner
Room Space
optimized
REV-00 / FEB 06
7 External Works
7.1 Carpark, Driveway & Porch 7.2
Field, Fence & Footbath 7.3
Play Courts & Parade Square 7.4
Outdoor Fitness Area 7.5
Gates & Signwall 7.6
Guard Post
3
VOL
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.1-1

NO. OF UNITS
As required. To provide 1 no. carpark lot for the handicapped from the total no. of required lots.
FINISHES
Road Marking Entrance Porch Bus Lots Carpark Motorcycle Lots Driveway 100mm wide LTA Approved Road Marking Paint Interlocking Pavers Interlocking Perforated Slab Interlocking Perforated Slab Interlocking Pavers Interlocking Pavers
DIMENSIONS
Porch shelter shall be min. 9.6m wide Min. 3.8m high for bus clearance Min. 4.5m high for fire engine clearance
USAGE
For staff and visitors vehicle parking.
PARKING LOTS
Bus Lots Carpark Lots Motorcycle Lots 4 nos. 13.2m x 3.6m 40 nos. 4.8m x 2.4m 6 nos. 2.4m x 1.0m
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.1-2
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF CARPARK / DRIVEWAY
SAMPLE SECTION OF ENTRANCE PORCH
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
1 no.
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

7.2-1
FOOTBATH
RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL
NO. OF UNITS FIELD SIZE
Size of Field for Non-Competition: 90.0m x 60.0m or 0.54 ha Buffer: 5.0m at the end of field and 3.0m at the sides Overall size with buffers: 100.0m x 66.0m or 0.66 ha Size of Field for Competition: 100.0m x 60.0m or 0.66 ha Buffer: 5.0m all round the field Overall size with buffers: 110.0m x 70.0m or 0.77 ha
FINISHES
Fence Sub-Soil Drain Chain-link fence with Galvanized Mild Steel Post & Painted To be Designed by Geo-Technical Engineer
GATES
Field Gates Side Gates Exit Gates 2 nos. 2.4m wide gates between school and field 1 no. 1.2m wide side gate for community use of the field 2 nos. 1.2m wide exit gates with a signboard Emergency Exit Only at both sides along the fence and to be located near to HDB void decks or open space. The location could be relocated upon principals request.
FIELD ORIENTATION
Ideally North-South Maximum deviation: 45 to North-South axis
HIGH FENCE
A high fence is to be provided for the field with the following site conditions: Refer plan showing critical dimensions D1, D2, D3& D4 At the ends of the field where the goal posts are located Located next to the school, carpark/public carpark or pavement of public road If the buffer is on a slope of more than 15 or 1:3.73, the high fence is to be at the top of the slope A 1.0m wide gate is to be centrally located along this fence, however, a low fence is still required at the bottom of the slope when the distance between play courts and the field is less than 3.0m
SERVICES/EQUIPMENT
Others 2 Horn Speakers & 1 no. microphone point to be provided
DRAINAGE
Optimize drains to take run off from field, courts and building Open galvanized steel gratings drain cover should be provided in new schools to replace concrete slab cover to meet statutory requirement To facilitate the cleaning of the drains by power jets, gratings should be placed parallel instead of perpendicular to the edges of surface drains
OTHERS
Goal posts to be provided by school Footbath near field to be provided, consist of 2 tap points, flooring to be of anti-slip material and necessary grating for proper drainage. Field to be designed so that it can be fenced up for use as a community field Refer to MOE Officer in Charge for the for the field. Guidelines on Assessment of Landscaping works
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

7.2-2
FOOTBATH
SAMPLE LAYOUT OF SECONDARY SCHOOL FIELD *Size of School Field for Competitions
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

7.2-3
FOOTBATH
SECTION A-A
PLAN OF FOOTBATH
ELEVATION 1
PLAN OF G.S GRATING
SECTION B-B
SAMPLE OF FOOTBATH DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
FIELD, FENCE &

7.2-4
FOOTBATH
CRITICAL DIMENSION OF HIGH FENCE
Front Elevation
Side Elevation CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF GOAL POST

REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-1

RECOMMENDED PROVISIONS FOR A TYPICAL SECONDARY SCHOOL
NO. OF UNITS
Play Courts 2 nos. Parade Square 1 no.
LOCATION
FINISHES & PROVISIONS

Basketball Backboard Painted 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with Volleyball/Sepak Takraw Fast Borundico Galvanized Steel Post & Painted Sleeve Cover of Solid Brass Fast Borundico Support of Galvanized Steel &
To be located away from roads, carparks and pedestrian linkways Consultants to propose appropriate means of protection for MOE approval when courts have to be located near such places due to site constraint
NETBALL COURT
Suitable Galvanized Steel Sleeves for net post 50mm Wide Lines in approved Pack Solvent with
Volley court lines to be provided with provision of galvanized steel sleeves for posts
ALL COURTS
Netball Court Parade Square
Cement Screed (if Netball Court is integrated Interlocking Pavers with the Parade Square)
Provide pavings/footpath of 3.0m minimum between two courts Provide drains with grating at least on one side of court Avoid planting tall trees near courts Court finish level at least 25mm above surrounding turf level All lines to be 50mm wide Regular cement screed flooring to all sports courts
PARADE SQUARE
Parade square 30.0m x 40.0m Planting space for trees and shrubs are recommended at the perimeter of the parade square A rostrum and 2 flag posts shall be provided at the parade square Drains surrounding the parade square and any internal drain courtyard shall be covered with grating running parallel to the drain
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-2
(TO BE DRAWN ONTO PARADE SQUARE, WHEREVER POSSIBLE)
NETBALL COURT
Goal Ring
Elevation NETBALL GOAL POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-3
See Detail A
BASKETBALL COURT
Front Elevation BASKETBALL POST
Side Elevation
DETAIL A
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-4
(TO BE DRAWN ON NETBALL COURT IF REQUESTED BY USER)
SEPAK TAKRAW COURT
LONG-JUMP / TRIPLE JUMP PIT
REV-01 / 16 APR REV-00 / FEB 06 04
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-5
See Detail A
See Detail B
(COULD BE DRAWN ON BASKETBALL COURT )
VOLLEYBALL COURT
DETAIL A
REV-00 / 28 JAN 04
VOLLEYBALL POST
DETAIL B
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-6
ELEVATION OF FLAG POLES FRONTING ASSEMBLY GROUND
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.3-7
PLAN OF RAISED PLATFORM
SECTION THROUGH PLATFORM
REV-00 / FEB 06
3
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.4-1
OUTDOOR FITNESS AREA
AREA
200 m2. or 40m X 5m
LOCATION
Area to be located free from underground services
OTHERS
School principal to select 10 out of 12 fitness equipment
Horizontal Ladder
Window
Step Up Blocks (5 Steps)
Press-up Logs
Inclined Flexed Arm Hang
Climbing Ropes
Pull-up Bars
Wall with Sand Pit
Sit-up Bench (4 pieces)
Leg Raise
Parallel Bars
REV-00 / FEB 06
Swing Bridge
3
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.5-1
GATES & SIGNWALL
MAIN ENTRANCE & SIDE GATE

Open inwards Security over gate (e.g. provide spikes) 1 no. of drop bolt for each leaf with metal sleeves Provide ball-bearing hinges if gate is too large and heavy Gates should not be designed with horizontal bars which can be easily climbed. Distance between bars should not exceed 150mm
SIGNWALL
Malay Chinese Tamil English
School name to be written in 4 languages in the following order:
Plan
School crest to be provided School name in English (Box Lettering) to be mounted on the school building located above 1st storey
OTHERS
To provide directional signs at strategic locations of new schools to be built to guide visitors to the school This requirement is to be evaluated by consultants on a case by case basis Consultants should review the location of the school and advise on the need and locations of the signs
Plan
Elevation GATE FOR MAIN ENTRANCE & SUBSTATION
REV-00 / FEB 06
Elevation SIDE GATE
VOL.
EXTERNAL WORKS
7.5-2
GATES & SIGNWALL
SAMPLE PLAN OF SIGNWALL
SAMPLE ELEVATION OF SIGN WALL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHER FACILITIES
AREA
7.6-1
GUARD POST
Max. 4sqm
CAPACITY
2 security officers
FUNCTION
To monitor human and vehicular traffic at school gates; To log in visitors particulars and issue entry passes; To monitor activities on CCTV screen
LOCATION / PROXIMITY
To be near main entrance gates of school with clear unobstructed view of the entrances for vehicles and visitors
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Minimal provision Window counter to be designed to facilitate exchange of passes and visitors enquiry
SERVICES
provided
Lighting and power points as required to be Electric fan to be provided and positioned as appropriate provided Connection to schools CCTV network to be
Exterior view GUARD POST
OTHERS
Guard post design should not be opulent. Doors and windows to be lockable to prevent theft Signage to be provided to enable visitors to identify Guard Post as a point of security Lightning Protection System shall be provided as required
Interior of GUARD POST
REV-00 / FEB 06
Design Handbook Vol. 3 Secondary School

S/ No.
1. 1.1-1
Page No.
Revision No.
01

03/2006 (May 06) Critical Info>Others
Amendment
Amended page reference - Proper distribution of M&E services Recommended Provisions>Finishes Amended type of Floor Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security: - Renamed and amend type of Security Key System - Renamed Alarm System
2.
1.2-1
01
03/2006(May 06)
Critical Info>Others Amended page reference Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted * >Fitment/Furniture>Students Table - Omitted text
3.
2.1-1 to 2.12
01
03/2006(May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted * Fitment/Furniture>DB Closet Omitted DB Closet dimensions 2.1-2>Drawing title - Amended drawing title
4.
2.4-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical Info>Area - Amended SWA details, Critical Info>Function - Amended text Critical Info>Fitment/Furniture - Insert Sliding folding acoustic partition details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Floor - Insert Ceramic tiles Finishes>Wall - Omitted Acoustic Fitment/Furniture>Pin-up board - Omitted Sliding - Omitted * Fitment/Furniture>Projection Screen
5.
2.10-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted * Fitment/Furniture> Cabinets Amended page reference
6.
2.13-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical Info>Services - update generic term Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Projection Screen: - Omitted * Fitment/Furniture>Computer Table & Cabinet - Amended page ref.
7. 8.
2.14-2 2.15-1
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
2.14-2>Drawing - Amended title Critical Info>Services Amended text Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Projection screen Omitted *
No.
S/
Page No.
Revision No.
Amendment
Services/Eqt>Computer ports - Amended texts
9. 10.
3.1-2 3.2-2
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
3.1-2>Drawing>Legend Amended item 1 & inserted items 11 to 20 3.2-2>Drawing>Legend Amended item 1& inserted items 7 to 11 - Amended Drawing title Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others Omitted roller shutter Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Projection screen Omitted * Fitment/Furniture>Tearchers Table - Omitted Ceiling Fitment/Furniture>Cabinets Amended page ref.
11. 12.
3.3-1 3.4-1
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
13. 14.
3.5-1 3.8-1
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture> Cabinets Amended page reference Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Teachers Table Insert dimensions Recommended Provisions>Safety/Security>Others Insert DB Closet
15.
4.8-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical Info>Location/Proximity Replaced Pastoral Care Room to Career Guidance Room Recommended Provisions>Title - Amended text Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Others Insert DB closet
16.
4.9-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
17. 18.
4.10-1 5.1-2
01 01
03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06)
Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Others Insert DB closet Recommended Provisions>Services/Eqt>Computer ports, Power Points, Lighting, Fans, Air-Con, Communications, Water Supply & Others - Omitted repetition
19. 5.8-1 to 5.82
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical Info>fitment/furniture Added mirror details Critical Info>Services - Added fan details Recommended Provisions>Fitment/Furniture>Others - Amended equipment details Services/Eqt>Fans - Amended fans details 5.8-2>Drawing & legend - Amended layout & Legends
20.
5.12-1
01
03/2006 (May 06)
Critical info>Location/Proximity Amended Technical Critical info>Fitment/Furniture - Insert flag holder details Critical info>Others - Insert back wall details Recommended Provisions>Finishes>Wall - Relocated detail of back wall to Critical Info column Fitment/Furniture>Others - Relocated detail of flag holder to Critical Info column

EDITION 2006
Vol. 4
Produced by
FOREWORD
> TECHNICAL <
Vol. 4
CONTENTS
Introduction
Architectural 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
Zoning & Layout Building Design Building Finishes
Fitment & Furniture
Engineering 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4
Plumbing
Electrical
Mechanical
Civil & Structural
Other Provisions 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5
Design Exclusions Upgrading Works External Works
Project Signboard Hoarding Design
Appendices 4.1
Specifications for CCTV System
REV 00 - FEB 06
Introduction
4
Introduction 1.1
VOL.
INTRODUCTION
This Volume consolidates information on architectural, engineering and other technical requirements that apply to school design and building. The information is provided according to what are deemed current and best to MOE schools. practices in the school building industry and what are considered relevant
1.2
This Volume is to be read in conjunction with Volumes 1, 2 and 3 of the School Design Handbook. The context of each provision herein is related to and 3. the general information and facilities requirements laid in Volumes 1, 2
1.3
All technical information in this Volume serve only as a guide to Consultants and highlight the more crucial aspects of the architectural, civil & structural, mechanical and electrical provisions and other building practices.
1.4
Consultants are encouraged to comply with them and make necessary modifications as they deem fit if the stipulations do not apply to a particular school. Consultants shall seek the approval of MOE and the school for their requirements. intended proposals when deviations or modifications are made to the
REV-00 / FEB 06
1 Architectural
Zoning & Layout 1.2
1.1
Building Design 1.3
Building Finishes 1.4
Fitment & Furniture
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-1
ZONING & LAYOUT
Zoning and Layout 1.1 Classroom blocks are to be located in quieter areas of the site. field must be placed away from classrooms. 1.2 Non-air-conditioned teaching spaces, especially classrooms,
Noisy activity areas such as canteen, parade square, courts and
Site factors to be considered
should not be physically enclosed or obstructed by other blocks like stair cores, toilets, etc to ensure good cross ventilation.
Non-airconditioned facilities
1.3
Non-air-conditioned teaching blocks facing each other shall have spacing distance of at least 18m between them. Blocks with corridors facing each other shall have spacing distance of minimum 16m between them, as shown in Diagram 1-A.
1.4
Rooms with equipment or materials requiring security are to be easily cordoned off at controlled points by roller shutters.
High Security Areas
1.5
The Staff Room and Media Resource Library (MRL) should not be on more than one level, where possible.
1.6
CCA Rooms and Health & Fitness Rooms are to be directly accessible from outside the cordoned or secured areas. This is to enable better security management after school hours.
1.7
Bin Center shall be located away from the schools main entrance. or residential houses. It should be in close proximity to the pathway leading to it.
Importantly, it should not be located next to pedestrian walkway Canteen, preferably behind the Canteen. It should have a proper
Services Areas
1.8
Substation location shall be accessible from public roads, but must not cause the school frontage to be reduced. It should preferably be located where it is not likely to be affected by future extensions.
1.9
Toilets with showers for students shall be located near the School Field or Canteen.
1.10
In designing for vehicular circulation, pedestrian safety must be given utmost consideration. Movement of school buses must especially be controlled.
Vehicular Circulation
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-2
ZONING & LAYOUT

External Works
1.11
Separate entry and exit points for vehicles (i.e. 2 gates) are to be provided if site condition permits.
1.12
External facilities like School Field and Games Courts are to be located away from the main driveway for safety reasons. If this is be provided. not possible, a physical barrier (such as planting, fencing etc) shall
Diagram 1-A
SPACING BETWEEN NON-AIR-CONDITIONED TEACHING BLOCKS
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-3
ZONING & LAYOUT
Setback & Spacing Requirements 1.13 When planning the layout of the various blocks of the school, certain minimum setback distances have to be observed.
1.14
From Teaching block to site boundary where : HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-B) Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-B) Setback = 6m Setback = 15m
School blocks to site boundary
1.15
From Non-Teaching and air-conditioned block to site boundary where : HDB flat abuts (See Diagram 1-C) Minor Road abuts (See Diagram 1-C) Setback = 6m Setback = 10m
1.16
Major road (Arterial A & Expressway) abutting school sites are acceptable if the school field can be used as a buffer. From Field to Fence (See Diagram 1-D) From Field to Games Courts (See Diagram 1-D) From Field / Games Courts to building (See Diagram 1-D)
1.17 1.18 1.19
Setback = 3m Setback = 3m Setback = 10m
Field setbacks
1.20
When 2 school sites are adjacent to one another, place each schools parade square away from each other to avoid interference during morning assembly.
1.21
To group noisy areas such as Canteen, Field and Games Courts together.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-4
SITE PLANNING
Diagram 1-B
SETBACKS FROM TEACHING BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS
Diagram 1-C
SETBACKS FROM NON-TEACHING & AIR-CON BLOCK TO SITE BOUNDARY WHERE MINOR ROAD AND HDB BLOCK ABUTS
Diagram 1-D
SETBACKS BETWEEN SCHOOL BUILDING, FIELD AND COURTS
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.1-5
ZONING & LAYOUT
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY 1.22 Spaces in the school building must be designed without hidden corners or corridors. facilitate visual supervision at all times. 1.23 Toilets, especially female toilets, This is to
No hidden corners
remotely located and must be easily accessible from teaching facilities.
shall
not
be
No remote locations
1.24
The upper levels of the school building shall be made secure after school hours by providing controlled access points at the ground level.
Controlled ground level access at
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-1
BUILDING DESIGN
Roof, Walls, Floors and Other Elements 2.1 2.2 2.3 Roof Profiles shall be simple. All roofs are to be accessible for maintenance. The roof shall have low reflectivity and luminance so the neighbouring buildings occupants will not be subject to glare or blinding reflection. 2.4
Roof
The roof shall have appropriate noise-damping provision and proper insulation to ensure that the noise of rain tapping on the roof is not deflected onto neighbouring buildings occupants.
2.5
The ground beneath all roof eaves shall be provided with a 1.2m wide pavement, to minimize the physical impact caused by splashing rainwater from the roofs.
2.6
All corridors and stairs must be sufficiently protected from rain with weather protection devices.
Corridors / Stairs
2.7
All corridors and staircases shall be adequately ventilated and well-lit. Double-loaded corridors are not allowed.
2.8
perforated aluminium or steel railings.
Corridor railings are to be 50% pre-cast concrete and/or 50%
2.9
Weather protection devices are to be lightweight and prefabricated. Their parts must be vandal-proof and not easily wobble. tampered with. It shall be sturdy such that it would not shake or
Weather Protection Device
2.10
The weather protection device should be vertically installed or inclined to prevent students from climbing onto them.
2.11
The weather protection device shall be designed to provide continuous protection, i.e., without gaps at intervals that would enable rainwater or sunlight entry. shall generate minimum noise when the rain falls on the devices. The material and design
2.12 2.13
Hollow core slabs shall not be used in wet floor areas. Falls and scupper drains are to be provided where necessary, e.g. along corridors.
Floors
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-2
BUILDING DESIGN
2.14
Drywall partitions shall not be provided in rooms which have wet areas or with critical security considerations. Dry wall partition e.g. corridors. or box-ups shall not be installed along high human traffic areas
Drywall Partitions
2.15 2.16
All drywall partitions shall be impact-resistant. Sliding folding The acoustic wall partitions shall be manually with
operable.
surface
shall
be
completely
flat,
no
Sliding Folding Partitions
protrusion or recess. Both sides of the partition panels shall serve as pin up boards. 2.17
Sound level transmitted through the partition, when completely through a normal dry wall partition.
closed, shall be equal or lower than sound level transmitted
2.18 2.19
Windows shall be anodised aluminium finish. Sliding windows are recommended for air-conditioned rooms. especially for windows opening into circulation areas.
Louvred windows are preferred for non-air-conditioned rooms,
Windows
2.20 2.21
Windows should not protrude into common circulation areas. Vents or windows shall be provided on two opposite-facing
walls of the classrooms. The amount of opening shall be sufficient to enable maximum cross ventilation within the classroom.
2.22
The vents and windows shall be easy to maintain and their handles shall be easily accessed by the users.
2.23 2.24 2.25
The use of architectural glass should be minimized. Full height windows are not allowed. Doors that are likely to come in contact with water shall be constructed in marine plywood or anodized aluminum.
Doors
2.26
Door trims should be hardy to receive the required locksets and withstand the occasional accidental slamming.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-3
BUILDING DESIGN
2.27
Types of door handles, stoppers/ catchers shall be chosen to pose a hazard to passersby.
carefully and their locations appropriately considered so as not
2.28
A covered linkway connecting the school building to the boundary gate nearest the public bus-stop is to be provided.
Covered Linkway
The following are guidelines on how to address Vision Care in facility design:
2.29
Non-air-conditioned
rooms
shall
be
orientated
with
their
windows facing the North-South direction. sunlight. 2.30
This is to ensure
Designing for Vision Care
that the whiteboard receives minimum glare from the incoming
Sunshades shall be provided along the windows facing the exterior.
2.31
The first 2m of the wall perpendicular to the whiteboard shall not have windows or openings that would allow light to infiltrate. This is to minimize glare on the whiteboard surface.
2.32 2.33 2.34
Whiteboard shall be tilted forward by 1 to 2 degrees. Whiteboard surface shall be of a non-glossy, matt finish. Proper lighting for vision care shall comply with specifications under Vol. 4, Chapter 2.3.
2.35
LCD projector is 60 degrees, as shown in Diagram 2-A.
Maximum viewing angle for the projection screen in rooms with
2.36
The maximum viewing distance from the whiteboard to the last row of students seats shall be 12.5m.
2.37
shown in Diagram 2-B.
Layout of room to address vision care is to be complied with as
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-4
BUILDING DESIGN
Diagram 2-A.
RECOMMENDED VIEWING ANGLES FROM STUDENTS SEATING AREA
Diagram 2-B.
VISION CARE LAYOUT IN A TYPICAL CLASSROOM
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-5
BUILDING DESIGN
State Flag and Signage 2.38 The State Flag shall be placed on the front wall of the classroom, high above a standing persons head and above all other decoration. No emblem of any kind shall be above the flag.
2.39
State Flag to all classrooms shall comply with the specification as follows: Design Material Printing Size Finishing Colour - Use artwork provided by MICA - Transparent Acrylic - Silkscreen Printing (Reverse) - 460mm x 690mm x 3mm with bevelled edges - Glossy, backing with approved protection - Pantone Red (032) or Sunflower Red
State Flag
2.40
Signage provision shall comprise room numbering and naming system to all rooms and facilities, including Canteen Stalls, Toilets and Services Rooms and compartments.
Signage locations
2.41
Information and directional signs shall be provided to staircases and lift lobbies at all levels.
2.42
Floor loading plan (6 colours per sign) shall be provided at every storey.
2.43
Acrylic holder to hold card of 100mm height shall be provided to every classroom.
2.44
Signage to rooms and facilities shall be in Acrylic block cutouts.
2.45
Signage on glass panels and doors shall be vinyl self-adhesive type.
2.46
Signage to external areas like building block, entrance sign-wall shall be in aluminium box lettering.
2.47
Road traffic signs (1 no. each) bearing "NO ENTRY" and "STOP" provided. including galvanized post and concrete foundation are to be
Traffic Signs
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-6
BUILDING DESIGN
2.48
Traffic directional signs (2 nos.) bearing school name informing Diagram 2-C.
road users of direction to school are to be provided, as shown in
2.49
All approvals from appropriate authorities are to be obtained for design and installation of traffic directional signs. sign wall is to be designed
2.50
Entrance
requirements stated in Vol. 2 - 6.5.
incorporating
the
Entrance Sign Wall
2.51
Signage lettering shall be anodised aluminium box letterings of should not be more than 200mm.
School Name in four official languages. Height of lettering
2.52
School Crest shall be installed at the schools entrance wall and at the front of the stage in the Hall.
School Crest
2.53
School Crest is to be of coloured fluorocarbon aluminium sheet, with different layers of aluminium sheet to denote different 1.2m for Hall stage. Diagram 2-C colours. Crest size shall not exceed 1m for entrance wall and
SAMPLE OF TRAFFIC DIRECTIONAL SIGN Note: Text height and arrow size to be provided in accordance to LTA Specification and approval. Text and signage to be double sided.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-7
BUILDING DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY & SECURITY 2.54 Handrails to both sides of staircases shall be at a The handrails must have returns. 2.55 Railings / Parapets along corridors and staircase
height between 580mm to 700mm for primary schools.
Railings
landings are to be provided at 1100mm above FFL. 2.56 Railing design must discourage students from climbing onto them.
2.57
Staircases shall have a width of 1.5m for safe mass additional handrail shall be provided in the middle of the stair width.
movement of students. For staircases wider than 1.5m,
Staircases
2.58
Staircases shall have uniform risers of 150mm (max) and treads of 300mm (min), and fitted with non-slip nosing in permanent contrasting colours.
2.59 2.60
Roof access shall be secure and vandal proof. Corridors shall have minimum width of 2.1m to Corridors
accommodate mass movement of students. 2.61 Ramps, instead of steps, are to be provided for changes in levels at corridors and high traffic areas.
2.62
Corridors shall be laid to fall towards scuppers or floor prevent accidental falls.
traps to facilitate proper rainwater drainage and to
2.63
Obstruction and protrusions such as fire extinguishers, water coolers, window and door swings into corridors must be avoided completely.
2.64
Doors that swing out into circulation areas shall preferably be recessed and door leaves shall not pose danger and injury to passersby. protrude into the corridor when opened so as not to Doors
2.65
Doors to air-conditioned rooms are to be provided with door closers and vision panels.
2.66
Door handles shall be free of sharp edges.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-8
BUILDING DESIGN
Requirements on Safety & Security (cont) 2.67 Timber doors at 1 st storey shall be in solid timber for greater security.
2.68
The key and locking systems to doors shall follow the Masterkey groupings as recommended in Table 2-D.
2.69
Glass doors shall have warning bands to prevent accidental crashes.
2.70
Security grilles shall be provided to all windows and Pastoral Care Room, Canteens Foodstalls and Stores and Non-Teaching Staff room. vents at 1 st storey except for Counselling room, Security Grilles
2.71
Security grilles shall be provided to sliding, casement, or top hung windows that face the external at the upper stories, except in air-conditioned rooms where the windows are normally closed.
2.72
Security grilles shall be provided to service areas and flat roofs to prevent unauthorized access. grille members spacing
2.73
Window
150mm.
shall
not
exceed
2.74
Roller shutters are to be provided at the entrances to the General Office, Media Resource Library, Staff Room and H.O.Ds Room.
Roller Shutters
2.75
Roller shutters are to be provided at the 1 st storey to every staircase.
2.76
The use of cantilever structure for linkways, bus shelters and entrance porches is discouraged. For all games courts except not Netball to
Cantilever Design
2.77
Court, change
the this Goalposts
goalposts are to be fixed to the ground. reasons, schools are allowed
For safety
provision to portable type even if the schools funded it. 2.78 If the games courts must double up as a fire engine access, the goalposts shall not be in the path of the fire engine access.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-9
BUILDING DESIGN
Requirements on Safety & Security (cont) 2.79 The Science Room shall preferably be located on the ground floor to enable quick evacuation in time of emergency. 2.80 The Canteen and Field may be used for assembly during an emergency. Public Address System is needed at the Canteen and Field for the schools management to give directions also required for the Field. 2.81 Sufficient gates are to guiding the students to move to safety. Horn speakers are Emergency Planning Science Room
be
provided
along
the
fence
surrounding the Field for discharging the students during an emergency. They are to be located near the HDB void decks or safe open space. The location could be relocated upon the Principals request. 2.82
The following shall be provided:

Canteen Field 1 microphone point and intercom system 1 microphone point and 2 horn speakers 2 internal gate (2.4m) between the Field and school compound 1 side gate (1.2m) for community use 2 exit gates (1.2m) each with Emergency Exit Only sign on both sides along the fence
2.83
The types and quantities of fire safety equipment shown in Volumes 2 and 3 are to be provided to serve as provisions on top of the standard statutory requirements.
Safety Equipment
2.84
During an emergency, all students may be required to remain indoors in rooms that have been designated by the school for in-place protection, e.g. Classrooms. All windows, doors and vents to the rooms are to be closed and sealed with plastic rooms shall comply with the following criteria: Have flat-surfaced frames to windows, doors and vents to facilitate easy sealing with masking tapes. Gaps around M&E services penetrations shall be sealed with appropriate materials to prevent gas seepage. acceptable air quality for its occupants. from both inside and outside. Large enough to provide a comfortable stay and an Should be easily accessible with doors that are lockable In-place protection
sheets against the migration of harmful vapours. The designated
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.2-10
BUILDING DESIGN
Table 2-D : Masterkey Groupings The following are the recommended key groupings for the facilities found in both primary and secondary schools.
Facility Type General Teaching 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Classroom Learning Support Co-ordinators Room Mother Tongue Language Room All Design & Technology Rooms All All Counselling Room Prefects Room Career Guidance Room Media Resource Library Multi-Purpose Hall a. Seating Area & Stage b. Control Room d. Store 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Furniture Store Canteen Non-Teaching Staff Room Health & Fitness Room Games Equipment Store CCA Room Bookshop Sickbay Dental Clinic Pastoral Care Room NCC/NPCC Room Rifle Range (Indoor) Rifle Range (Outdoor) Armoury Toilets & Showers LAN Room Central Server Room A A A A A A A B B Individual key B Individual Key Individual Key B c. Changing Room A B A D Administrative and Staff Areas B B C C Masterkey Grouping
Special Teaching Rooms
Ancillary
Services Areas Key Alike to all Toilets Individual key Individual key
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.3-1
BUILDING FINISHES
3.0 3.1
Building Finishes The colour, density, water absorption and abrasion resistance of all wall finishes shall be carefully chosen especially when they are to be applied to wet facilities or areas that are to ease cleaning. exposed to water. This is to slow down the onset of mould and
Wall Finishes
3.2
The type of paint selected for the lower half of corridor walls shall be easy to maintain, as these wall areas are prone to stains and marks.
3.3
Backsplash panels must be provided to wall areas that are prone to dampness due to the presence of washing facilities, water coolers or any other water dispensers.
3.4
Ground level floor finishes that are adhesive bonded shall take into account the rising dampness that may de-bond the finishing.
Floor Finishes
3.5
Vinyl sport flooring shall be heavy duty to withstand equipment load and accidental weights dropped on the floor.
3.6
Vinyl flooring in computer rooms shall be heavy-duty antistatic type.
3.7 3.8
Warranty shall be provided for vinyl flooring. Where applicable, concrete topping shall be used in place of cement sand screed.
3.9
Suspended ceilings are to be provided to all areas at the upper special rooms with ceiling requirements.
most storeys (with exception to areas with flat roofs) and all
Suspended Ceiling
3.10
All rooms specified with ceiling shall be provided with nonacoustic ceiling boards of regular material (e.g mineral fibre or gypsum) except facilities such as Hall.
3.11
Access openings shall be provided in ceilings to facilitate periodic inspections. Installation requirements for the ceiling system are to be adequately provided for.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.3-2
BUILDING FINISHES
3.12
Rooms with false ceiling, which are equipped with projector screen and/or ceiling fans, shall have minimum floor to ceiling clear height of 2.8m.
Requirements on Safety & Security 3.13 Floor materials selected for wet areas shall be slipresistant to prevent accidental falls. 3.14 All design and fixing detail drawings of proposed ceiling systems by the Contractors relevant qualified Consultant. 3.15 persons shall, before installation, be cleared by the Floor finish
Suspended Ceiling System
Mock-ups of 2800mm by 2400mm ceiling grid with fixings and accessories shall be inspected and its (S.O.) approval. design submitted for the Superintendent Officers
3.16
Prior to installation of the ceiling, the Consultant shall brief the site supervisor on the inspections required for the system and make checks on other system components like M&E fixtures to ascertain that these are independent of the suspended ceiling system.
3.17
that the various fixings and accessories have been inspected for safety during supervision.
A checklist shall be prepared by the S.O. to ascertain
3.18
installation shall also be recorded in the checklist. This checklist is to be filed on site and made available for verification and inspection when necessary.
The
range
of
tests
conducted before
and after
3.19
The checklist shall be duly signed by the Clerk-OfWorks representatives to acknowledge that 100% check has been conducted. (COW) and submitted to the S.O.s
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-1
FITMENT / FURNITURE
4.0
Fitment Design The following section recommends the types of fitment that can be provided for schools according to the teaching and requirements. Samples of fitment prototypes are illustrated for indicative purposes only. Consultants are to consult the school and MOE on the actual design and quantity of fitment required for each particular facility. Consultants shall also comply with the criteria on fitment design as laid down below: learning needs within the facility as well as the storage
4.1
Where electrical and IT provisions are to be incorporated into provided. They shall also be visible and not hidden from view.
the fitment design, easy access to these points shall be
Electrical & IT points within easy access
4.2
Workbenches that serve as computer or writing stations shall be provided with sufficient knee clearance.
4.3
Worktops that are meant to carry machinery shall be made of shall be made of non-porous, solid surfacing material. heavy duty material. Those with sink incorporated in them
Heavy duty worktops for machinery
4.4
All fitment located in areas with wet facilities shall be provided with a concrete base with tile finish.
Tiled concrete base for fitment in wet areas
4.5
The whiteboard shall be inclusive of a pen tray, rounded-off at its edges, and installed with its bottom edge at 700mm (for PS) or 850mm (for SS) above the floor level.
Whiteboard
4.6
Vision care needs for whiteboards as outlined under Vol. 1 & 4 shall be addressed.
4.7
Cabinets and its components (swing doors, drawers, sliding doors, glass sliding doors, etc.) are to be provided with locks. Locks with removable key type when locked or unlocked are to be provided.
Cabinet Locks
4.8
All fitment shall be designed and installed to cater for fitments e.g. wash basin, urinals, pedestal toilet, canteen stall students of an average height. For installation of particular
Height of fitments
counters, canteen wash troughs etc, the height of lower primary or shorter than average students must be taken into account.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-2
FITMENT / FURNITURE
FITMENT PROTOTYPES
(COMMON TO PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SCHOOLS)
TYPE 4-1 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD & PIN-UP BOARD - Whiteboards are sliding and tilted forward 1 to 2 degrees from vertical plane. - Shelves are adjustable - LAN points/power points are integrated, with at least one each at both ends of the cabinet.
Locations: Mother Tongue Language Room Mathematics Room Art and Crafts Room Audio Visual Room Science Room Computer Room IT Learning Resource Room Humanities Room Commerce Room Music Room
Type 4-1
Elevation
Pen Tray Detail
Section A
Section B
Sample Elevation and Sections of High Cabinet with Whiteboard & Pin-up Board
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-3
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Locations: Learning Support Coordinators Room Art & Crafts Room Science Room Staff Resource Room Preparation Room/Store Type 4-2
TYPE 4-2 : WORKTOP WITH HIGH CABINETS - This fitment has 4 variations that can be combined.
4-2A (High Cabinet with Cupboard)
4-2B (High Cabinet with Drawers)
4-2C (High Cabinet with Knee Space)
4-2D (High Cabinet with Sink)
Typical Section
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-4
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Locations: Learning Support Coordinators Room Science Room Meeting Room Counselling Room Staff Lounge Staff Resource Room Pastoral Care Room Health & Fitness Room Art & Crafts Room Kitchen Preparation Room Type 4-3
TYPE 4-3 : LOW CABINET - This fitment has 4 variations that can be combined.
4-3A (Low Cabinet with Cupboard)
Typical Section
4-3B (Low Cabinet with Drawers)
Typical Section
4-3C (Low Cabinet with Sink)
Typical Section
4-3D (Low Cabinet with Open Shelves)
Typical Section
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-5
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-4 : TRAPEZOIDAL TABLE - The table comes in different sizes. Type 4-4
Location: Mathematics Room Art and Crafts Room Science Room IT Learning Resource Room (with port holes) Media Resource Library Pastoral Care Room.
TYPE 4-5 : HIGH CABINET Type 4-5
Location: General Office Games Equipment Room Dental Clinic Kitchen Preparation Room Non-Teaching Staff Room
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-6
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: H.O.Ds Office General Office Staffroom
TYPE 4-6 : STAFF WORKSTATION - Each workstation shall be provided with 1 no. service outlet box each with 1 no. twin gang 13A power point and 1 no. computer point.
Type 4-6
4-6A (HOD, AM, OM) (8m 2 )
4-6B (Staff Room) (4m 2 )
Legend 1. 1 set of Modular Partition 2. Main Table 3. Side Table 4. 1 set of Overhead Storage Units 5. 1 set Pedestal Drawers 6. Metal Cabinet 7. Chairs
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-7
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Kitchen Kitchen Preparation Room Needlework Room
TYPE 4-7 : DISPLAY CABINET - Glass doors on upper for display - Low cabinet / worktop
Type 4-7
Elevation
Section
TYPE 4-8 : OPEN SHELVES
Location: Kitchen Needlework Room Office Store Audio Visual Store Type 4-8
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-8
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Art & Crafts Room Type 4-9
TYPE 4-9 : SUPPLY CABINET & FOLIO CABINET
Sample Elevation and Section of Folio Cabinet
Type 4-10
Sample Elevation and Section of Supply Cabinet
TYPE 4-11 : MUSIC RACK AND CABINETS FOR BAND INSTRUMENTS
Location: Music Room and Music Store
Type 4-11
Sample Of Music Rack And Cabinets For Band Instruments
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ARCHITECTURAL 1.4-9
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-12 : TEACHERS TABLE Type 4-12
Location: Science Room
Sample Elevation and Section of Teachers Table
TYPE 4-13 : HIGH CABINET WITH BUILT-IN SAFE Type 4-13
Location: Principals Office
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Built-In Safe
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Media Resource Library
TYPE 4-14 : SINGLE & DOUBLE SEAT COMPUTER TABLE
Type 4-14A
Type 4-14B
Sample Of Single Seat Computer Table
Sample Of Double Seat Computer Table
TYPE 4-15 : TIMBER OPEN SHELVES
Location: Media Resource Library Type 4-15
Sample Of Timber Open Shelves
TYPE 4-16 : MEDIA ISLAND FOR 3 TERMINALS
Location: Media Resource Library
Type 4-16A
Type 4-16B
Sample Plan and Section of Media Island For 3 Terminals
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Media Resource Library Type 4-17
TYPE 4-17 : AV EQUIPMENT WORKTOP
Sample Elevation of AV Equipment Worktop TYPE 4-18 : NON-PRINT MEDIA CABINET Type 4-18 Location: Media Resource Library
Sample Elevation and Section of Non-Print Media Cabinet Location: Media Resource Library Type 4-19
TYPE 4-19 : BOOK CHUTE
Sample Internal Elevation and Section of Book Chute

REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Multi-Purpose Hall Changing Room Type 4-20
TYPE 4-20 : DRESSING TABLE
Sample Elevation of Dressing Table TYPE 4-21 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES Location: Games Equipment Store Type 4-21
Sample Of High Open Shelves TYPE 4-22 : COUNTER CABINET Location: Bookshop Type 4-22
Sample Elevation and Section of Counter Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Bookshop Type 4-23
TYPE 4-23 : HIGH OPEN SHELVES
Sample Elevation and Section of High Open Shelves
TYPE 4-24 : LONG CABINET WITH SINK
Location: Dental Clinic Type 4-24
Sample Elevation and Section of Long Cabinet With Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-25 : WORKTABLE
Location: Dental Clinic Type 4-25
Sample Elevation and Section of Dental Officers Worktable
TYPE 4-26 : WAITING BENCH - For students to sit and await consultation Type 4-26
Location: Dental Clinic
Sample Of Waiting Bench
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
FITMENT PROTOTYPES (COMMON TO FACILITIES IN A SECONDARY SCHOOL)

TYPE 4-27 : HIGH CABINET FOR HUMANITIES SUBJECTS Storage for resource materials, charts and models. Transparent glass doors for display as required. Type 4-27 Location: Humanities Workroom
Sample Elevation of Cabinet for Humanities Workroom TYPE 4-28 : HIGH CABINETS FOR MUSIC - Storage for Curriculum Music and Band Instruments. Type 4-28A Location: Music Store
Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Curriculum Music Type 4-28B
Sample Elevation and Section of Cabinet for Band Instruments

REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-29 : WORK BENCHES FOR LABS - Storage for laboratory instruments and teaching resources.
Location: Chemistry Laboratory
Type 4-29A
Sample Elevation and Section of Teachers Work Bench
Type 4-29B
Sample Elevation and Section of Students Work Bench
Type 4-29C
Sample Elevation and Section of Side Workbench With Sink
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Biology Laboratory Physics Laboratory
TYPE 4-31 : MICROSCOPE CUPBOARD - Storage of Scientific Equipment e.g. Microscopes

-
Dehumidifier system as required Type 4-30
Sample Elevation and Section of Microscope Cupboard
TYPE 4-31: WORKBENCH CUM OVERHEAD STORAGE - Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage - Includes min. 1 workstation for laboratory assistant - Worktop for preparation of experiments - Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of instruments Type 4-31
Location: Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.
Sample Of Workbench Cum Overhead Storage
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Science Lab Preparation Room / Store.
TYPE 4-32 : MOVABLE HIGH CABINET WITH GLASS DOORS - Storage for scientific supplies, equipment, articles and instruments for mass usage instruments - Glass doors for easy identification and retrieval of
Type 4-32
Sample Elevation and Section of Movable High Cabinet With Glass Doors
TYPE 4-33 : WORK BENCHES FOR KITCHEN
Location: Kitchen
Type 4-33A
Sample Of Teachers Demonstration Table Type 4-33B
Sample Of Students Workbench

REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Kitchen Type 4-34A
TYPE 4-34 : LOW CABINETS FOR KITCHEN
Sample of Low Cabinet with Louvred Door Type 4-34B
Sample Of Resource Corner Cabinet (For 1 Kitchen Only)
TYPE 4-35: TEACHERS WORKSTATION - For preparation of lessons and teaching materials Type 4-35
Location: Kitchen Preparation Room/Store.
Sample Of Teachers Workstation
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: Kitchen Preparation Room
TYPE 4-36: CHARTS CABINET Storage for subject materials like food charts etc. Type 4-36
Sample Elevation and Section of Charts Cabinet
TYPE 4-37: HIGH CABINET FOR KITCHEN Storage for kitchen equipment and utensils.
Location: Kitchen Preparation Room
Type 4-37
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet for Kitchen
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-38: HIGH CABINET WITH RACK
Location: Needlework Room
Type 4-38
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Rack
TYPE 4-39: GARMENT CABINET
Location: Needlework Room Type 4-39
Sample Elevation and Section of Garment Cabinet
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-40: WING MIRROR
Location: Needlework Room Type 4-40
Sample Elevation and Section of Wing Mirror
TYPE 4-41 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & DRAWERS - The provision of drawers to be on one side only if the length of wall is insufficient.
Location: D & T Studio 1 & 2 Design Room D & T Studio (LS).
Type 4-41
Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinets & Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-42 : CONCRETE COUNTER WITH CABINETS & SINK - The position of sink to be near doorway so that students can wash their hands on their way out of the Studio. Sufficient standing room to be considered. Other sinks in the Studio to be centrally located to provide better access to students from various work zones. Type 4-42
Location: D & T Studio 1 & 2 D & T Studio (LS)
Sample Elevation and Section of Concrete Counter with Cabinet and Sink
TYPE 4-43 : CONCRETE COUNTER FOR SOLDERING
Location: D & T Studio 2 D & T Studio (LS) .
Type 4-43
Sample Elevation and Section of Counter for Soldering
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-44 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS
Location: D & T Design Room Store.
Type 4-44
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers
TYPE 4-45 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS
Location: D & T Design Room Store.
Type 4-45
Sample Of High Cabinet With Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-46 : HIGH SHELVES
Location: D & T Studio Stores (Tools Stores) Type 4-46
Sample Elevation and Section of High Shelves
TYPE 4-47 : LOW CABINET WITH OPEN SHELVES
Location: D & T Studio Stores (Main Stores)
Type 4-47
Sample Elevation and Section of Low Cabinet With Open Shelves
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-48 : HIGH CABINET WITH DRAWERS
Location: D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-48
Sample Elevation and Section of High Cabinet With Drawers
TYPE 4-49 : OPEN SHELVES WITH DRAWERS
Location: D & T Studio (LS)
Type 4-49
Sample Elevation and Section of Open Shelves With Drawers
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
Location: D & T Studio (LS) Type 4-50
TYPE 4-50 : HIGH CABINET WITH WHITEBOARD AND PIN-UP BOARD
Sample Elevation of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-up Board
Section A-A
Section B-B
Sample Section of High Cabinet with Whiteboard and Pin-Up Board
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
FITMENT / FURNITURE
TYPE 4-51: RIFLE RACKS
Location: Armoury Type 4-51A
Sample Elevation and Section of Enclosed Type Rifle Rack Type 4-51B
Sample Elevation and Section of Two-Tier Open Type Rifle Rack
REV-00 / FEB 06
2 Engineering
2.1
Civil & Structural 2.2
Mechanical 2.3
Electrical 2.4
Plumbing
4
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.1-1
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
Civil & Structural Works Design of the Structural System shall comply with Building Codes as well as Buildability Requirements.
Instructional areas must be column-free
Instructional areas shall be column free. Intermediate columns which protrude from the walls or limit future extension works shall be avoided.
1.4
School Fields shall be turfed with Cow Grass (Axonopus Compressus) and grown to produce a continuous cover over the whole field. The school field shall be rolled even and properly compacted with adequate drainage system.
School Field
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.2-1
MECHANICAL
2.0
Mechanical Systems The following requirements for mechanical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications and obtain MOEs approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements exhaustive. Consultants are advised to check with the MOE officer-incharge if they require further clarifications.
are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not
2.1
The operating indoor conditions shall be 240C 10C & 65% RH 5% unless otherwise noted. The operating conditions for Computer Rooms, LAN and Central Server Room shall be 5%. 230C 10C & 60% RH
Air-Conditioning System
2.2 2.3 2.4
Noise level: NR 40 in Library, Computer Rooms, Offices, Music Rooms, AV Rooms and other air-conditioned rooms. Consultants shall propose the most energy-efficient air-conditioning system. Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRV) air-cooled split units (with 100% standby and automatic changeover) shall be used to serve the LAN and Central Server Rooms only.
2.5
Fresh air supply duct shall be concealed in the ceiling and connected to the fan coil unit where connection port is available in the FCU. For adjacent to the FCU with a suitable grille. wall mounted FCUs, the fresh air supply duct shall be terminated
2.6
Condenser units shall be suitably located on the ground with
protection around it and away from vehicular and human traffic and/or on roof level with proper access for maintenance. No condenser units are allowed to be installed on the faade of buildings.
Location of CU
2.7
hard-wired to a central controller located at a suitable location within the room, preferably near the lighting switches.
In all air-conditioned rooms with fan coil units, each unit shall be
2.8 2.9
A Professional Engineer shall endorse all hangers and anchoring bolts to slabs and roof structure/trusses. Toilets shall be provided with central ducted exhaust system with low-level extraction points installed in all WC compartments. Exhaust or Y profiles. grilles used for these low level extracts shall have blades with either V
Mechanical Ventilation
2.10
Exhaust fans shall be located on the roof. All discharge points of the toilet and kitchen exhaust systems shall be located above the roof level and shall not face any residential blocks. from the toilet or kitchen exhaust fans.
2.11
The noise level shall not exceed 65dBA when measured at 1m away
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.2-2
MECHANICAL
2.12 2.13
Kitchen exhaust duct material shall be aluminium. The exhaust hood and grease filters shall be stainless steel. If school blocks are 5 storeys and higher, two 20-person electric
traction lifts shall be provided. Lifts shall be provided with automatic doors during power failures. rescue devices (ARD) to bring the lifts to the nearest floor and open
Lift Installation
2.14
If a low-rise school is designated as a handicapped school, one 13person electric traction lift shall be provided. This lift shall comply with the handicap-access requirement.
2.15 2.16
Double-leaf doors with sufficiently large glass vision panels shall be provided for all lifts. 1 no. alarm bell shall be located at the 1st storey lift lobby. Bell should be labeled Lift Alarm Inform office or Call for lift service if bell is activated.
2.17 2.18
The intercom in the lift car shall be linked to the General Office and the lift motor room. A lift supervisory repeater panel shall be located in the General Office.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-1
ELECTRICAL
3.0
Electrical Systems The following requirements for electrical works shall be fully complied with. Consultants are required to submit justifications and obtain MOEs approval for non-compliance cases. The requirements are in addition to the usual standard design specifications and are not exhaustive. Consultants are advised to clarifications. check with the MOE officer-in-charge if they require further
3.1
Electricity supply (applied load) for a typical primary and secondary school shall be 1000kVA each. The ultimate load for shall be 1500kVA. primary school shall be 1250kVA while for secondary school it
LT Works
3.2
Main consumer sub-switchboard, distribution boards serving
sensitive equipment such as computer equipment, fire alarm, security alarm, etc shall be equipped with lightning surge arrestor.
3.3
Canteen stalls shall be provided with a Centralised Consumer Metering Panel to house the stalls electrical meters. This shall be provided in a closet within the canteen.
3.4
Cabling
requirements: -
standards
must
meet
the
following
minimum
Main Distribution Distribution
- PVC/SWA/PVC cables in trench/HD UPVC Pipes - PVC/PVC cables in metal
ladders/trays or PVC cables in metal trunking cables in concealed
Final Sub-Circuits All Specialist System
- PVC
GI
conduits for all areas - Approved cables in concealed GI conduits 3.5 All single-phase final distribution board shall be metal-clad complete with outgoing single pole MCBs, incoming D/P MCB and RCCB. 3.6
All three-phase final distribution board shall be metal clad complete with single pole MCBs and triple pole MCBs with appropriate rupturing capacities ratings.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-2
ELECTRICAL
3.7
All circuits serving computer loads shall be dedicated. Every outgoing circuit shall be equipped with RCCB and designed to connect to a maximum of 3 twin-gang IT power outlet.
3.8
Computer rooms and IT Resource rooms shall be equipped with a
master on-off switch to control all the power points. Such a master switch shall be located next to the lighting switches. accidental operation. Master switches shall be appropriately identified to prevent
3.9
with equipment and furniture layouts. This is to ensure easy access to the points during use and maintenance of equipment.
The electrical points shall be properly located in co-ordination
Electrical Points
3.10
Lighting level in all rooms meant for teaching, working and reading purposes shall be designed to an average illuminance of 500 lux with a uniformity factor (min/ave) of 0.7. temperature shall be 4000k with colour index of 85. The colour
Lighting / Vision Care
3.11
Lighting controls shall be in rows and parallel to the whiteboard. A light switch shall be provided for each row of light fittings.
Lighting / Vision Care -Whiteboard
3.12
Light fitting at whiteboard shall be an asymmetrical type with correct orientation to direct light beam onto the whiteboard. The shall be carried out at night based on 3 x 3 grids. average vertical illuminance shall be 300 lux. Site measurements
3.13
Non-dimmable highfrequency electronic ballast shall be used in offices. all fluorescent light fittings within teaching areas/facilities and
3.14
Reflectors to be matt type.
100% iridescence free reflection.
The louvers attachment shall give
3.15
Ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the lightings and no plane.
flickering shadows of the rotating fans are cast on the working
3.16
Unless otherwise specified, lighting in rooms/areas for general usage shall be designed to 300 lux.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-3
ELECTRICAL
3.17
Lux level for corridor shall be 50 Lux while that for main school lobby/main foyer/entrance shall be 100 Lux.
3.18
The switch control in the Multi Purpose Hall shall be designed to
flexibly control the lighting levels i.e. 500 lux for examination row switching.
Lighting / Vision Care -Multi-Purpose Hall
purposes and 300 lux for badminton games (recommended) using
3.19
row is arranged parallel with the badminton court layout. During a off to avoid glare.
The high bay lightings shall be controlled row by row where each
badminton game, lights directly above the court shall be switched
3.20
switches shall be at the control room and the stage area.
There shall be two-way switches for high bay lightings.
The
3.21
Parade square shall be provided with 4 nos. of 400W floodlight. Switches controlling the floodlights shall be located at a safe and convenient location.
3.22
Timers shall be used for perimeter lights, security lights and first storey corridor lights.
3.23
The Stage Lighting system shall comprise (but not limited to) a dimmer rack, 24-channel manual and memory control desk, lighting bars and beam arms, 8 units of 1000W beam light, 6 units of 650W variable Fresnel spotlight, 4 units of 650W variable prism convex spotlight, 4 units of 500W-4 cyclorama floodlight, 6 units of 500W-1 compartment cyclorama floodlight and safety chains for the luminaries (certified by PE). compartment
Stage Lighting System
3.24
Consultants shall note that besides the stage lighting system, area.
general lightings and ceiling fans shall be provided at the stage
3.25
Ceiling fan shall come complete with proprietary-made stainless aircraft cables. The ceiling fan rods shall have batch-tested labels from locally approved authorities.
Electrical Fan
3.26
All wall and ceiling fans shall be certified by locally approved year of installation shall be provided on each fan.
authorities. In addition, a durable sticker indicating the month and
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3- 4
ELECTRICAL
1.5m sweep controlled with speed
3.27
Ceiling
fans
shall
have
regulators. 3.28 Heavy-duty (min. 500mm diameter) wall fan with low noise level (max 60dBA when measured 1m away from fan) shall be provided for the Multi-Purpose Hall. The cage and blades shall not rust easily. 3.29
The Structured Cabling System shall be designed to MOE IT Branchs latest version of MOE Infrastructure Requirements for School.
Structured Cabling System
3.30
All cables within rooms/facilities shall run in Heavy-Duty PVC skirting-trunkings.
3.31
All trunking and conduits passing through/terminating in the LAN and Central Server Rooms shall be properly sealed internally and externally to protect from condensation in these rooms.
Trunking & Conduit
3.32
Two-compartment underfloor GI trunking shall be provided for computer rooms and IT Learning Resource Room.
3.33 3.34 3.35
A clean earth shall be provided for computer network. Computer Point label shall be engraved on the IT socket outlets. Where applicable, one LAN point with a twin-gang power point shall be provided on either side of a whiteboard. (One point for teacher and one point for printer.)
LAN Points
3.36
Consultant shall ensure ceiling fans do not interfere with the projection of the image of the LCD projector. Refer to Diagram 3-A. Refer to diagrams 3-B, 3-C and 3-D for LCD support bracket details and setback distances.
Display LCD Projector
Cable Ready
3.37
Cable ready MATV system shall be provided. It shall be designed and installed so as to facilitate future cable TV connection.
Master Antenna Television (MATV) System
3.38
Certificate of Cable Readiness shall be obtained from IDAs approved cable operator.
3.39
The internal telephone distribution network complete with wirings shall be in concealed GI conduits.
Telephones
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-5
ELECTRICAL
3.40
Public Address System (PA) shall be a stand alone system. The design shall take into consideration the clarity of speech, ease of maintenance as well as future expansion.
Public Address System (PA)
3.41
PA system provision shall be at the following places: Canteen Multi-Purpose Hall Parade Square School Field Each level of each building block (grouped as one zone)
3.42
The system shall comprise (but not be limited to) a power speakers, horn speakers, column speakers,
amplifier, PA call station console, ceiling recessed speakers, box microphones, cardiod microphones, microphone stands (table receptacles, DVD player, master station, video display unit, PA intercom set, battery backup, equipment rack and cabinets. condenser
stand type and floor stand type c/w boom arm), microphones
3.43
The system shall be supplied with the following equipment: 4 units dynamic cardiod microphones 2 units table microphones stands 2 units telescopic floor microphone stand c/w boom arm 1 unit gooseneck microphone stand c/w clip on adapter and table flange for mounting onto lectern. 1 unit wireless clip-on microphone system.
3.44
The Professional Sound Reinforcement System for each Audio
Visual Room shall comprise (but not limited to) an 8-channel integrated mixers, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player, speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack.
Sound Reinforcement System
3.45
The Professional Sound System within the Multi Purpose Hall (MPH) shall comprise (but not limited to) a 16-channel mixing console, equaliser, microphones, cassette decks, DVD player, at the control room.
speakers and other accessories housed in a console rack located
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-6
ELECTRICAL
3.46
A lockable tabletop cabinet complete with drawers shall be provided. The tabletop space shall be sufficient to cater for the placement of stage lighting dimmer control desk and sound reinforcement system control desk.
3.47
The system shall be designed and commissioned by a sound specialist. coverage throughout the entire area or room where it is installed. The system shall provide high quality sound reinforcement for specific programs such as speeches, talks, debates, dramas and concerts. The design shall be capable of providing uniform
3.48
The Electronic Security Alarm System shall comprise dual-tech motion detectors, magnetic door contacts, siren & strobe lights, panic button (in Principals Room) and key holding service.
Electronic Security Alarm System
3.49
Each room under surveillance shall be designed/programmed as one zone.
3.50
For the Armoury (in SS only), consultants shall liase with relevant authorities to inspect and approve the security alarm system.
3.51
A dedicated lease line shall be provided and connected to an alarm monitoring company for the key holding services.
3.52
Fire Alarm System shall be a stand-alone manual system. All areas points and sounders. Additional sounders shall be provided in all Music Rooms. along escape route shall be provided with manual alarm call
Fire Alarm System
acoustic-treated rooms such as the Audio Visual Rooms and the
3.53 3.54
Smoke detectors shall be installed in LAN and Central Server rooms. The tone of the school bell shall be distinct from the fire alarm bell to allow for immediate recognition by occupants.
3.55
One unit of clock and bell timer shall be installed in the General Office. The clock chime system shall be capable of interfacing with the PA System.
3.56
Terminal devices that allow high-speed signal transmission shall be used when link-ups from equipment to the PLC exceed 10m.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3- 7
ELECTRICAL
3.57
The central monitoring shall be in the form of LED mimic display panel located in the General Office.
3.58
The following points shall be monitored/controlled by alarms:
Equipment
Run/ Start Control
Run/ Start Status X X
Fault Trip Alarm X X
Supply Status X X
Power
Water Alarm Level
Low
Water Alarm Level
High
Temp. Status
High
Booster Pump Hosereel Pump Water Tank Exhaust Fan Kitchen VRV air Conditioner Air-Cooled Package Unit
X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Exhaust Fan
3.59
Equipotential netting shall be provided at the parade square and outdoor courts.
Lightning Protection System
3.60
The internal dimensions of the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) shall be 1.0m x 1.5m. The height of the room door shall be 2.1m. 2 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for the room.
Services & Switch Rooms
3.61
The internal dimensions of the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) shall be 2.0m x 2.0m. 4 Nos. of diameter 110mm lead-in pipe shall be provided for TER.
3.62
A Design & Technology (D & T) Switch Room is required to cater for the 3-phase electrical supply to Design & Technology areas. Its room area shall be 16 m2. The clear height of the room shall be min. 3.6m.
3.63
The D & T Switch Room shall be located near the D & T Studios 1 & 2, Wood Machineshop and Design Room. The door of the room shall open into a corridor.
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-8
ELECTRICAL
3.64
Maximum width shall be given for the door opening and proper drainage shall be provided for the service trench in the D & T Switch Room. A fire extinguisher and a single gang power point shall also be provided. The lighting level in the room shall be 300 lux.
3.65 3.66
The lead-in pipes provision is as shown in Diagram 3-E. CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (CSRS) shall be provided at all with. For cases of non-compliance, consultants are required to submit justifications for MOE (SEMPO) s approval.
schools. The requirements for the above system shall be fully complied
CCTV Surveillance & Recording System
3.67
The provision of CSRS includes the supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of a set of cameras, CCTV surveillance, recording system, hardware and software. The Specifications for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System is at Appendix 1 of Vol. 4.
Diagram 3-A
SAMPLE OF CEILING DIAGRAM
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-9
ELECTRICAL
Diagram 3-B
SETBACK DISTANCE AND POSITION OF PROJECTOR
Diagram 3-C
ENLARGED DRAWING OF SECURITY BOLT
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-10
ELECTRICAL
Diagram 3-D
LCD SUPPORT BRACKET
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3- 11
ELECTRICAL
Diagram 3-E
CRITICAL DIMENSIONS OF SERVICE TRENCH LAYOUT
SECTION OF LEAD-IN PIPE TRENCH FOR D&T SWITCH ROOM
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.3-12
ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS ON SAFETY AND SECURITY 3.68 All air-conditioning condenser units or other services shall be enclosed to prevent unauthorized tampering. Air-Conditioning
3.69
Light fittings are to be independently supported by
approved means and structural PEs certification for multi-purpose hall light fitting installation must be obtained.
Light Fitting Installation
3.70
The following fan installation requirements are to be followed: Fan spacing is recommended to be at 3m apart. The fan blade must be a minimum of 2.5m above and fan blades. Fan rods are to withstand 10 times the deadweight of the fan. Stainless steel wire with safety factor of at least 20 times the static load of the fan to serve as backup support for the fan in the event that the support fails due to wear and tear. Fan bolts, nuts, washer must be tightened with torque wrench. Consultant must ensure 100% inspection of all fans. Fans Installation FFL with 250mm minimum clearance between ceiling
3.71
All M & E panels and provisions (such as rising, fire panels, dry riser) are not to protrude into the corridor hazards. Such provisions shall be recessed. or other work spaces as they could pose as safety
well-contained
Services to be
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.4-1
PLUMBING
4.0 4.1
Plumbing The water supply system shall be an indirect feed system with a serving two (2) droppers (potable & flush water) for every toilet tank shall be provided nearby.
single tank, dual pump-set and a main distribution header shaft. A plinth provision for future toilet flushing water storage
Water Supply
4.2
The material of the water tank shall be Glass-Reinforced Plastic (GRP).
4.3
Isolation valve shall be provided at every main and branch distribution pipes. Mini isolation valve shall be provided for each appliance / fixture.
4.4
Sub-meter shall be provided at each canteen stall. From each meter, a separate pipe shall be drawn to the central wash area trough and terminated with a lockable tap.
4.5
Electric Hot Water Storage System shall be used for the Kitchen (Home Economics).
Hot Water System
4.6 4.7
The hot water supply temperature shall not be less than 500C. Grease trap shall be positioned close to the driveway for ease of
maintenance and connection to disposal vehicle/truck. Floor trap gratings shall be made of stainless steel.
Waste and Sanitary System
4.8 4.9
Tank room is not required to house the hosereel tank if it is located on the roof. Trellis or otherwise shall be provided to shield the hosereel tank from view.
Hosereel System
4.10
No pipe work of any kind shall pass through LAN and Central Server Rooms.
4.11
Underground concrete storage water tank shall be provided if a development.
fire hydrant pumping system is required for the school
Fire Hydrant System & Dry Riser System
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
ENGINEERING
2.4-2
PLUMBING
4.12 4.13
Diesel driven pumps shall not be used for the pumping system. Pillar hydrant shall not be installed in the vicinity of the parade square, outdoor courts and fitness area. If unavoidable, underground hydrant with proper drainage shall be installed.
4.14
Breeching inlets, landing valves, hosereel, pipe or fitting shall
not protrude into the clear pathway of corridors, staircase or other space that will obstruct the smooth passageway of occupants.
Gas System
4.15 4.16
Town gas shall be used. Water mains, sanitary drain-lines and hydrant pipes shall not be laid under parade square, school field, outdoor courts and fitness area.
REV-00 / FEB 06
3 Other Provisions
3.1
Design Exclusions 3.2
External Work 3.3
Upgrading Works 3.4
Project Signboard 3.5
Hoarding Design
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.1-1
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS
1.0
Design Exclusions The following items are some standard statutory requirements that may not be applicable or relevant to MOE schools. item in the list and apply for necessary waivers from the respective statutory authorities. Consultants shall evaluate the applicability and relevance of each
1.1
BCA
handicapped are required for every area accessible to students. of schools designated with full-handicap facilities.
regulation
states
that
provision
for
the
physically
Handicap Provisions
This applies only to MOE schools that are within the 10% stock For all other schools, only basic-handicap provisions are to be catered for, i.e, barrier-free accessibility is required only at 1 st storey at the Administration area, Canteen and at least one of is to be provided at one toilet cluster at every level only. 1.2
the classrooms blocks. In addition, one ambulant-disabled toilet
BCA regulation states that no part of the room (other than a room in a warehouse) served by windows or openings shall be openings. MOE schools Canteen and Hall block are granted waiver to exceed the stipulated width. Generous openings are provided at two sides of the Canteen and Hall. The Canteen and Hall are also installed with ceiling fans to improve air more than 12m away horizontally from the windows and
Hall and Canteen widths
circulation.
Furthermore, the Canteen is only used for about half an hour by students during recess time. 1.3
BCA regulation states that the windows and openings for natural ventilation shall be so located that they face and open upon (i) the sky (ii) a street, service road or other public space an air-well. MOE schools have rooms at the Canteen block e.g. CCA rooms, Bookshop that do not open directly to the external, but are provided with louvred windows and doors. The doors and windows have to be located within a distance limit acceptable to BCA, to the nearest external space. (iii) an open-yard or open space located on the building lot (iv)
Location of Windows and Openings for Material
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.1-2
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS
1.4
BCA regulation states that every room in any building shall be provided with natural light and ventilation by means of one or more windows or openings having an aggregate area of not less area is more than 10% of the floor space, at least 10% of the floor space shall be openable. The BCA regulation cannot be complied with as stores in the school need to be compartmentalized due to Fire Code. These rooms are non-habitable. than 10% of the floor space of the room and if the aggregate
Area of Window Openings for Natural Ventilation
1.5
URA regulation states that walls or fences which are constructed of chain-link fencing, railings, grilles, or any like material which allows the passage of light and air may be constructed up to a maximum height of 3000mm. MOE schools are allowed to provide a 4600mm high fencing flying out of the school compounds for safety reasons.
Height of Walls and Fences
along the edge of the football field to prevent high balls from
1.6
FSSD states that where a kitchen is required for the preparation of food, and, where open flame cooking appliances are used, building by compartment wall and floor having fire resistance of at least one hour. Separation requirement for kitchen could be exempted in MOE the kitchen shall be separated from other parts of the same
requirement for kitchen
Separation
schools where there would be at least 25% of the perimeter walls of the canteen opening directly onto the external and the floor space is within 9 meter from the nearest opening. 1.7
FSSD requires fireman access panels (FAP) to be provided to every floor. of FAP. MOE schools will have unobstructed circulation corridors instead
Fireman access
1.8
FSSD regulation requires the dry rising main to be installed in more than 10m, but does not exceed 60m.
buildings under purpose group III where habitable height is MOE projects consist of mainly upgrading of existing blocks. Addition of dry riser and breeching inlets to the existing blocks will require major changes to the structure design. Some projects are exempted from the requirements.
Dry Rising Main
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.1-3
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS
1.9
FSSD regulation requires that the number and distribution of rising mains to all parts of any floor more than 10m and not landing valve. exceeding 24m above the ground level is within 38m from a MOE schools are allowed to go beyond 38m, provided there are 2 nos. standby hose within the coverage.
1.10
FSSD regulation requires that decking of the raised floor shall be
constructed of non-combustible material or where combustible material is used as core material, if allowed in the case of sprinkler protected buildings, the top, bottom, all sides and cut complying with Class O (excluding materials for floor finishes) edges shall be covered with material with surface properly
Combustible Material Application
Timber flooring is allowed in the school hall as part of MOEs
requirement. The height of the concealed space measured between top of the structural floor and underside of the raised timber floor decking is usually not more than 55mm high. The school hall also has 2 hose reels and 6 fire extinguishers provided to address this regulation. 1.11 National Parks Board (NPB)
accessway and access road shall not encroach into green buffers, peripheral plantings verges and planting verges within car parking areas. In schools undergoing upgrading, due to tight
requires
that
the
fire
engine
Green Buffers not to be encroached upon
configuration, some building blocks cannot be shifted to achieve
site
the required width of planting verge. Hence, encroachment by green area must be compensated by grass-cell pavers to provide greenery. 1.12
the fire engine access into the green areas is allowed but the
NPB requires provision of a 2m wide planting verge on at least one side of the proposed internal driveway. In schools where there is space constraint, a minimum 0.5m wide planting box is provided on one side of the internal driveway.
Planting Verge
1.13
NPB requires provision of a minimum 2m soil depth for tree planting. Where the fire engine access is built beneath a building structure which is near to the tree planting strip, only a 1.5m soil depth for tree planting is provided so that headroom of buses. 4.5m can be achieved for the passing of fire engine and school
Soil Depth
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.1-4
DESIGN EXCLUSIONS
1.14
IDA requires that the Co-axial Distribution Room (CDR) size to be 2.2m x 2m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the CDR size to be reduced to 1m x 0.5m (internal dimensions) but the door height shall be 2.1m
CDR
1.15
IDA requires that the Telecom Equipment Room (TER) size to be size be reduced to 2.0m x 2.0m (internal dimensions)
3.0m x 2.5m (internal dimensions). IDA now agreed that the TER
TER
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.2-1
EXTERNAL WORKS
2.0 2.1
Landscaping Basic turfing, trees and shrubs are to be provided to green plots and perimeters around the school.
Turfing
2.2
The selection of plants is to be conducted in consultation with National Parks Board to ensure appropriate provisions for the to be designed in consultation with the school and MOE. plants are planned for. Landscaping features and structures are
2.3
The following are some pointers which need to be addressed in providing for landscaping in schools: Careful attention to spatial design, roof form, building coverage and shadow line to ensure the green areas can thrive without mechanical support (sprinklers etc).
Design considerations
Careful selection of building material to support plant life. Ensure safety in the design of softscaping and hardscaping to minimise risks to users and persons involved in and eco ponds (if any). maintaining them (especially of hanging planters, trellises
Proper waterproofing, drainage, down pipes or sub-soil
layers for landscaping above ground to be provided for. Ensure rainwater down pipes or drains are not choked by fallen leaves due to the location of trees or plants. Minimise any event of soil spillage along corridors especially during wet weather. 2.4 Ensure planting does not cause nuisance or hazards by the type of preferred but not limited to, are as listed below:
plant proposed. The characteristics of trees and shrubs that are
Flora selection considerations
fast growing and shady. shed very few leaves and are green all year round.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.2-2
EXTERNAL WORKS
have ground roots that are less extensive so as to avoid damage to ground features and underground services.
bear little or no fruits as these may attract insects and birds, and spoils may present a hygiene and maintenance problem.
flowering shrubs that do not attract insects which may pose harm to students.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.3-1
UPGRADING WORKS
EXCLUSIONS
3.0 3.1
Scope of Upgrading Works for schools undergoing PRIME The objective of upgrading is to ensure that school facilities provision meets the latest standards and specifications of MOE in terms of curricular, co-curricular and operational needs. The upgrading works may involve the following:
Scope of Upgrading to fulfil latest MOE specifications
Increase in general Nett Floor Area (NFA) Increase in no. of classrooms Increase in classroom size Addition of new building facilities Enlargement of facilities Addition or extension of new support facilities Refurbishment to the latest standard of finishes Improvement works to external facilities
3.2
The upgrading works have also to meet the latest planning requirements stipulated by MOE and the statutory authorities. Some of the works involved include: Orientation of classrooms Provision of fire engine access Planning setbacks Use of water-saving cisterns in toilets/ sensor-operated flush valves for urinals and water closets in toilet cubicle for ambulant disabled and wheelchair users. Upgrading switchroom, installation.
Upgrading works to meet latest statutory requirements
of M&E services, e.g new substation and cabling and electrical fixtures, air-
conditioning, water reticulation system and gas piping
Upgrading of civil works e.g underground services and retaining walls.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHER PROVISIONS
3.3-2
UPGRADING WORKS
EXCLUSIONS
Design approach
3.3
The design approaches for each school may vary. Consultants are required to carry out analysis of the needs and requirements of the school and recommend suitable solutions for the school. Consultants shall identify and keep MOE informed of any shortcomings of the proposals or solutions.
3.4
The alternatives to upgrading on site include: To move the existing school out to a holding school and rebuild a new school on site To move the existing school out to a holding school while upgrading the existing premises
3.5
In the case of upgrading a school with the occupants still operating on site, the two salient criteria are: To ensure safety of the students To minimise disruption to the operations and normal functioning of the school
Important Criteria for upgrading a school on site
3.6
In order to ensure safety of students during the upgrading process, the site planning has to take into consideration the following requirements:
Safety Criteria
A separate access to the site for construction vehicles is available A clear separation access of for construction construction area from it the is
operational side of the school (for schools with no alternative premises) Ensure that schools security, safety and public relations strategies and measures are understood and complied with recommended that the school moves out to holding vehicles,
REV-01 / MAY 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.3-3
UPGRADING WORKS
EXCLUSIONS
Minimizing Disruption
3.6
In order to minimise disruption to normal class activities, the main approach is to minimise structural changes to the existing blocks. The works to existing teaching blocks should be limited to internal A & A works, which can be carried out during the school holidays. site. If there are major shortfalls in area, a
new block could be constructed on a vacant area of the
Whenever extensions to existing structures are required, structures are to be proposed independent of the existing structures.
e.g. extension to the hall and canteen, new load-bearing
Where space permits, a temporary hall/canteen structure is to be provided as a sheltered assembly area during the upgrading/ extension of the old hall/canteen. The construction system to be used would need to be considered very carefully. Bore piling is to be proposed for the foundation of the new blocks, as opposed to driven piles. In addition, micro-piling system is to be proposed for any extension to existing blocks in view of the limited There should be temporary facilities provided in place of the affected facilities.
access and working area near the existing structures.
3.7
Consultants are advised to carry out their own detailed study and analyses of the site and building works and recommend commencement of works. solutions. suitable solutions for the school and MOE for approval prior to The Consultants shall highlight and keep MOE informed of the shortcomings of their proposed
Proposed plans for upgrading
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.4-1
PROJECT SIGNBOARD
4.0
The following are samples of project signboard design for MOEs school development projects. Diagram 4-A
SAMPLE ELEVATION Diagram 4-B
SIGNBOARD PART DETAIL
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.4-2
PROJECT SIGNBOARD
Diagram 4-C
SAMPLE FRAME DETAIL

Diagram 4-D
SAMPLE SECTION A-A
REV-00 / FEB 06
4
5.0 5.0
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.5-1
HOARDING DESIGN
Hoarding Design for Schools undergoing PRIME The hoarding and project signboards to be used for the upgrading works are as shown in Diagrams 5-A to 5-I.
Diagram 5-A
DETAIL Signboard to be used (as internal facing) only where construction works are taking place adjacent to existing operating school premises To be aluminum silkscreen / painted
SAFETY SIGNAGE FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKS Diagram 5-B
HOARDING FOR PRIME PROJECTS
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.5-2
HOARDING DESIGN
Diagram 5-C
O-Orange (BS 06E51) G-Grey (BS 00A05) R-Red (BS 04E53) B-Blue (BS 020D45) W-White (BS 00E55) BK-Black
NOTES The colours will be to SOs approval For project rebuilding works, replace Upgrading Works to Rebuilding Works Contractor to verify all dimensions on site before fabrication
EXPLANATION FOR GRAPHICS: The design is represented by a pair of hands holding a book with a page about to be turned over revealing a new chapter. The composition symbolizes the delivery of the education for a new millennium where there will be an
extensive use of its technology. The swirl is the symbol for the new millennium and the circuitry denotes technology. The colours of the MOEs crest are adopted for the graphics.
REV-00 / FEB 06
VOL.
OTHERS PROVISIONS
3.5-3
HOARDING DESIGN
Diagram 5-D
LEGEND O-Orange (BS 08E51) G-Grey (BS 00A05) R-Red (BS 04E53) B-Blue (BS 020D45) W-White (BS 00E55)
* The colours shall be to SOs Approval
COLOUR DIAGRAM
Diagram 5-E
HOARDING DESIGN FOR NEW WORKS
REV-00 / FEB 06
4 Appendices
4.1
Specifications for CCTV System
Appendix 1
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUPPLY, DELIVERY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF A CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS TO THE SCHOOLS This compliance checklist sets forth the detailed specifications. The explanation to the Code is as follows:
Code M P Explanation Mandatory The vendor is to meet the necessary mandatory. Primary Requirement The primary requirements refer to the most important specifications. The vendor is to meet the primary requirements or propose substitutes to the primary requirements. Optional Requirement The optional requirements refer to what is preferable and desirable to have. Information
O I
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 1 of 11
1. INTRODUCTION
Appendix 1
Description 1.1 Background 1.1.1 Ministry of Education (MOE) is sourcing for a CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including cameras for educational institutes with the option to connect to the school local network. 1.1.2 A newly setup of CCTV System comprises 12 cameras for Primary & Secondary and 16 cameras for Junior College. 1.2 Scope 1.2.1 The vendor must supply, deliver, install, test and commission the CCTV surveillance and recording system with the necessary hardware, software, training and documentation as specified in this document. The vendor is responsible for ensuring that a complete working system is provided. 1.2.2 The work scope must include a professional site survey and advise to the school on the suitability of camera locations and any additional technical requirements. The professional site survey with recommendation on the operation siting of camera location, the type of lens to be used and any technical requirements are to be documented. One copy is to be forwarded to the school for verification and endorsement before any work is carried out. 1.2.3 The work scope must also include the cabling job, like proper termination of DC/AC and Coaxial Cable connections and supply of any other equipment for the complete system as stated in this specification. 1.2.4 The work scope must include follow-up on fine tuning of the camera positions, focusing, reviewing images and recording settings; and any technical adjustment to the hardware and software within 30 days of installation. 1.2.5 The vendor must be responsible for the rectification of all defects within a twelve (12)-month Warranty Period of the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed at no extra cost to the contract. During the warranty period, the vendor should be responsible for all cost incurred in repairing and replacement of the faulty equipment. The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras installed during the Warranty Period is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11. 1.2.6 The vendor is to quote, as an option, for schools to enter into 2 years comprehensive maintenance agreement upon expiry of the warranty period with the option to renew for another 2 years up to a total of 6 years. Vendor should provide the work scope of a maintenance agreement in the submission of the quotation. The scope of the warranty and maintenance agreement should include but not limited to the following:- Repairs and replacement of faulty components - Quarterly servicing, specialised cleaning on sensitive components and testing
REV-00/FEB 06
Code
Remarks School has the option to decide.
Vendor to submit the quotation as optional item.
Page 2 of 11
Appendix 1
Description Attendance to breakdown, power failure and other contingencies when the system is not fully functioning. This includes inspections and investigation on causes of system mal-function and prompt rectification. - Provides quarterly updates with the latest Anti-virus Signature files and Operating System patches. - If the system is connected to the school LAN, the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available) - Vendor is to provide the renewal of security software license installed in the system. - The response and turnaround time for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including Cameras for the maintenance contract is shown in Appendix 1, Page 11 of 11. 1.2.7 The specification is given as a performance related specification for the system and equipment. It is the responsibility of the vendors tendering to select the most appropriate equipment to fulfil the objectives and requirements of the system. Part of the tender evaluation process will to access the quality, reliability, and suitability of the equipment proposed. 1.3 General Requirements Description 1.3.1 The proposed system is to be easily scale for future expansion and needs of the education institutes. 1.3.2 All proposed hardware and software must include features to integrate fully with existing computing resources, namely the school Local Area Network. 1.3.3 All hardware and software being proposed is to be fully compatible and interoperable. With the option to connect to the school local network. The system must be compatible to the school computer which is installed with Microsoft Operating System. 1.3.4 The proposed system should be compliant with all MOE policies, including but not limited to the MOE security standards. 1.3.5 The proposed system is to be compatible and interchangeable with any types or brands of industry standard cameras. 1.3.6 The proposed system is to operate on a 230-volt, single phase, 50 Hz input electric power supply. 1.3.7 The proposed system should include features of lightning protection for components exposed to such risks. 1.3.8 The vendor is to submit as part of the proposal, the detailed technical specifications of all equipment and schematic diagrams of the equipment showing their interfaces with each other, if any. Includes all product brochures, catalogues, detail and updated documentation. 1.3.9 The vendor is to provide up two centralised training sessions for up to 30 participants per session. 1.3.10 The connection from the video cameras to the CCTV
REV-00/FEB 06
Code
Remarks
Code M M
Remarks
M M M
Page 3 of 11
Appendix 1
Description network should be made by secured means/medium so to prevent eavesdrop and hacking to the system. The vendor should include detailed technical specifications of the secured means/medium as part of the proposal. 1.3.11 The vendor should include an option to provide 15 minutes Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS) to the system. In the event of prolong power failure, the UPS should send shut down signal to the critical system (that cannot withstand power shutdown) for a graceful shutdown sequence. Code M Remarks
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 4 of 11
2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE CCTV SURVEILLANCE AND RECORDING SYSTEM INCLUDING CAMERAS Description 2.1 General 2.1.1 The CCTV Surveillance and Recording System shall be likely to install in the schools General Office (the actual location shall be determined by the school). 2.2 Operating Environment 2.2.1 The proposed system must include features to integrate with the existing school network infrastructure. 2.2.2 All software for the management of the proposed system must include features to support remote management from a client workstation locally. 2.2.3 The operating system must be embedded Microsoft or Linux. If the proposed system uses any other proprietary OS, vendor is to specify the detail including the country of origin. The vendor should provide all software licences that are deployed for the system to operate. 2.3 Physical Housing 2.3.1 The proposed system is to have all vital recording components and features condensed into a single box unit for ease of use and administration. 2.3.2 The proposed housing must be of industrial grade that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours, 7 days week. Stable temperature under non-air conditioned environment with high performance ventilation system. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF) 2.3.3 The proposed system is to have option for non rack mountable or rack mountable to conserve space and easily integrate into existing server rack. 2.3.4 The proposed system is to have at least 2 types of hardware locks, like keyboard lock, security key. Code Remarks
Appendix 1
M M
P P
2.4 CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (Hardware and Software) 2.4.1 The vendor is to state the type of system proposed for CCTV Surveillance and Recording System including the detail of M the hardware and software. 2.4.2 The proposed system is designed such that minimum knowledge on the use of personal computer system is M required for daily operation. 2.4.3 The proposed system is installed with at least an Intel Pentium 4, 2.6 GHz, HT Technology, 1024 MB RAM or M equivalent. 2.4.4 The vendor is to recommend the video compression technique basing on the frame per second stated in M paragraph 2.4.7 and must be open IEEE standard. 2.4.5 The proposed system support PAL/NTSC signal. M 2.4.6 The proposed system is able to support up to 16 cameras. M
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 5 of 11
Appendix 1
Description 2.4.7 The proposed system is able to store up to 3 weeks of recording at least 8 fps and at resolution of 640 x 480 for all 16 cameras in a continuous recording mode. The HDD must be hot swappable and with a 20% buffer capacity. The proposed system is allow Video Triplex Multiplexing (Record, Playback and Archive) simultaneously The proposed system is to have Watermarking feature for video authentication. The proposed system is able to support Watch Dog function. The proposed system is to have motion detection or event recording with zone masking and sensitivity configuration features for individual camera. The proposed system is able to support Time & Date Stamping on Video recording. The proposed system is to have image enhancement feature for individual camera for display and recorded images. The proposed system is to have image digital zoom capability. The proposed system is able to support scheduling for individual camera recording profile. The proposed system is to allow digital search of all videorecordings of cameras based on times and dates stamp. The proposed system allows playbacks and be able to be exported out into both picture and video format (AVI, JPEG or Bitmap). The proposed system must include features to allow user to access with web browser or any client software up to 3 LAN user computer systems within the school. The proposed system must include features to provide network support (100 BaseT). The proposed system must include features for alarm, MMS, SMS or telephone call notification alert upon event triggering. The proposed system is able to output images to TV. The proposed system is to have the option for backup of the recording if the primary HDD failed. Vendor is to provide detail on the types of backup system. The storage device must be hot swappable. The proposed system is to include 1 x 17 LCD monitor or equivalent, keyboard and mouse and/or remote control that allow user to select the viewing of the camera image, configuration / setting of the DVR, exporting images, etc. The proposed system is to consist at least have full screen, 2-split, 4-split, 8-split, 10-split, and 16-split screen displays of video from the cameras. State otherwise if it is different. The proposed system is able to support 4 video outputs (1 x S-Video, 1xVGA, 1xBNC Monitor and 1xTV Monitor). State otherwise if it is different. The proposed system is to have the rotation (Auto-Selector) screen feature. The proposed systems is able to supports a minimum display resolution of 640 X 480 for up to 16 cameras Code Remarks
2.4.8 2.4.9 2.4.10 2.4.11
M M M M M M M M M M
2.4.12 2.4.13 2.4.14 2.4.15 2.4.16 2.4.17
2.4.18
2.4.19 2.4.20
M M
2.4.21 2.4.22
M M
2.4.23
2.4.24
2.4.25
P P P
2.4.26 2.4.27
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 6 of 11
Appendix 1
Description 2.4.28 The proposed system is able to support different setting in recording rate/speed for different cameras. 2.4.29 The proposed system is able to support output video or images in AVI, JPEG or Bitmap. 2.4.30 The proposed system is to have at least 6 multi-users access levels with password access, security rights for different class of users, etc. Vendor is to provide detail on the multi-users setting. 2.4.31 The proposed system provides video editing facility to allow exporting of certain desired portion of the video-recordings onto DVD/RW (to be provided with the system) or external storage device using USB. The man machine interface of the video editing software shall be user friendly for the user to operate on. 2.4.32 The proposed system is able to support retrieving playback concurrently during recording locally within the designated displays for monitoring. 2.4.33 The proposed system is to have the advanced object feature that allows user to search the movement of object in the particular area selected on the date/time selected. 2.4.34 The proposed system is able to support control and interface with up to 2 x Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras. 2.4.35 The components for the proposed system must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local non-air conditioned environment, 24 hours recording, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test including: - Thermal Profile Test - Reliability Prediction Test (MTBF) Code P P Remarks
P M
2.5 Optional Installation 2.5.1 The vendor is to provide quotation as optional items stated in paragraph 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 for the school to install the additional features. The quotation for the optional items valid for 2 years upon contract awarding. 2.5.2 Connection to School LAN The vendor provide the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected to the school LAN. The option to connect to the school LAN includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary. All personal computers or servers connected to the School LAN have to be installed with Anti-virus software and the latest Operating system patches. When connected to the School LAN, the system will have to comply with all existing MOE security policies e.g. the system must be updated with the latest Anti-virus Signature files (on a daily basis) and Operating System patches (as and when available). If the system should be connected to the school LAN and wireless is proposed, the vendor must comply with all existing MOE security policies including providing a firewall, VPN and any other hardware/software necessary to secure the system from security breaches.
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 7 of 11
Appendix 1
Description 2.5.3 Notification Alert Upon Event Triggering The vendor provides the option for the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System to be connected for the notification alert upon event triggering. The option to connection includes the provision of any additional infrastructure (e.g. cabling) and hardware/software necessary for the following: a. SMS (MMS) alert notification. b. External device alarm (siren, burglar alarm or strobe light). c. Telephone call alert. 2.6 CCTV Colour Dome Camera (Indoor Camera) 2.6.1. Day and night colour camera. 2.6.2. A minimum horizontal resolution of at least 420 TV lines. 2.6.3. Image pick-up device of 1/3 Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD or equivalent. Code O Remarks
M M Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.
2.6.4. Lens is to have Electronic Iris. Fixed lens and lens must be of glass material. Vendor is to recommend the best focal lens to be used in order to suit the site environment.
2.6.5. White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites 2.6.6. Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual overwrites 2.6.7. Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux colour (F1.2) and 0.03 Lux black and white (F1.2) 10-Bit. 2.6.8. Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec 2.6.9. Compatible with various lens types. 2.6.10. Camera assembly is to be easily installed and removable. 2.6.11. Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage including DC12V /AC24V power supply. 2.6.12. The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting. 2.6.13. Maximum Aperture Ratio 1:1.3 ~ 2.0 2.6.14. Angle of View H: 74.2 Deg ~ 30 Deg, V:54 Deg ~ 22.4 Deg, D: 96.8 Deg ~ 37.4 Deg 2.6.15. Scanning System 2:1 Interlaced (PAL) 625 Lines / 50 Fields / 25 Frames 2.6.16. Video Output 1.0V[p-p] PAL Composite, 75 ohm / BNC Connector 2.6.17. S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) 2.6.18. Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C 2.6.19. Operating Humidity: 30% ~ 90% RH 2.6.20. Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System.
M M M M M M M M
P P P P P P P M
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 8 of 11
Appendix 1
Description 2.6.21. Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF). 2.7 CCTV Colour Fixed Camera (Outdoor Camera) 2.7.1 Day and night colour camera. 2.7.2 A minimum horizontal resolution of 480 TV lines. 2.7.3 Image pick-up device of 1/3 Super HAD CCD. Sony CCD or equivalent. Code M Remarks
M M Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the CCD Vendor is to provide the brand and country of manufactured for the Lens.
2.7.4
Lens is to have Auto Iris and Vari-focal lens of 6 to 60mm. The lens must be of glass material. M
2.7.5 2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.7.11 2.7.12 2.7.13 2.7.14
2.7.15 2.7.16 2.7.17 2.7.18 2.7.19 2.7.20
2.7.21
White Balance: Auto with manual overwrites. Auto Back Light Compensation (ABLC): Auto with manual overwrites. Minimum Illumination: 0.5 Lux Colour (F1.2) and 0.01 Lux Black and White (F1.2) Picture Elements: Minimum 542 (H) x 582 (V) / PAL Electronic Shutter of PAL: 1/50 ~ 1/100,000 Sec Compatible with various lens types. Camera assembly is easily installed and removable. Lens mount to be CS mount or C mount with the supplied adaptor. Camera is to be able to accept a wide range of input voltage including DC12V/AC24V power supply. The proposed system is to have camera intelligence light sensing mode control to prevent colour and black and white hunting. Scanning System 2:1 Interlaced (PAL) 625 Lines / 50 Fields / 25 Frames Video Output 1V (p-p) PAL Composite, 75 Ohm / BNC Connector S/N Ratio: Not less than 50 db (AGC Off) Operating Temperature: -10 Deg C ~ +50 Deg C Operating Humidity: Less than 90% RH (No condensation) Camera must be tempered proof with alarm triggering upon the termination of video transmission to the Surveillance and Recording System. Outdoor weather proof housing includes sunshield for all outdoor camera installation. The housing must meet IP66 standard.
M M M M M M M M M M P P P P P M
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 9 of 11
Appendix 1
Description 2.7.22 Camera and lens must comply with industrial standard that can operate under local environment, 24 hours, 7-days week. Vendor is to provide the detail reports of QA Test conducted on the camera and lens by the manufacturer including the reliability prediction test (MTBF). 2.8 Installation 2.8.1 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for indoor is above false ceilings in PVC conduit pipes whenever possible, otherwise in PVC trunking. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the schools representative after tender is awarded. 2.8.2 All cabling work (video cable and electrical cables) for outdoor is to conceal in water proof PVC conduit pipes. Detail of cabling work is to be determined during the site survey with the schools representative after tender is awarded. 2.8.3 Coaxial Cable of RG59 up to 150m and RG6 > 150m to 400m. Comply to - UL1354 or equivalent (Must submit certificate) Length marking on cable compulsory. Include BNC connectors on coaxial cable ends. 2.8.4 To provide all necessary 13 Amp power points for all cameras and DC adapter. 2.8.5 When the DC/AC termination is at the camera point, the DC/AC power supply point is to be enclosed in a metal housing to prevent vandalism and turning off the power supply to the camera. 2.8.6 To supply and install (including ceiling or wall mounting bracket and cabling) for a 21 Flat Screen CRT TV at the General Office. 2.8.7 To supply and install (including video and power supply cabling) for a 17 CCTV monitor at the Security Guard location (exact location is to be determined by the school). 2.8.8 The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of surge protection device for the appropriate outdoor camera for protection of high voltage surges from nearby lightning strike. Code M Remarks
M M
M M Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Surge Protection Device as optional item. Vendor to submit the quotation for 1 x Video Signal Booster as optional item.
2.8.9
The vendor is to provide professional advice to the school for the installation of video signal booster for the appropriate outdoor camera.
2.8.10 The vendor will be responsible for providing all access equipment necessary to enable safe installation of all high level equipment and cabling. 2.8.11 All installations must comply with all relevant statutory requirements, Code of Practices, other current regulations and industrial best practices.
M M
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 10 of 11
RESPONSE AND TURNAROUND TIME 1. System Breakdown Severity
Appendix 1
S/N 1
SEVERITY Critical
Urgent
Normal
DEFINITION Critical defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System critical functionalities or total system failure, and no work around solution exits. This includes the Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 50% and above of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images. Urgent defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the System such that required operational objectives cannot be achieved and work-round solution exists. This includes the CCTV Surveillance and Recording System (hardware and/or software) and/or 25% to 49% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images. Normal defect shall be defined as defect, which affects the camera or other external peripherals. This includes 25% of cameras installed not transmitting images or with blurred images, and external peripherals like keyboard, mouse, remote control, monitors, etc.
2.
Response and Turnaround Time

S/N 1 SEVERITY Critical RESPONSE TIME Less than Four (4) working hours after receiving service call Less than Eight (8) working hours after receiving service call Next working day TURNAROUND TIME System must be up within 1 working day System must be up within 2 working days System must be up within 3 working days.
Urgent
Normal
3.
Definition a. Definition of Working Hours
The Working Hours shall be from Monday to Friday (9.00 am to 6.00 pm) excluding Saturday, Sunday and Public Holiday. b. Definition of Response Time
The Response Time shall be the time between notification of the problem to contractor and the response by the contractor to the site. c. Definition of Turnaround Time
The Turnaround Time shall be defined as the period of time between the arrival of the contractors maintenance staff after notification by the Authority of the defect and the acceptance by the Authority of the restoration of the system operation availability.
REV-00/FEB 06
Page 11 of 11

Design Handbook Vol. 4 Technical
S/ No.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.1-4 1.2-3 1.4-2 1.4-6 2.3-4 2.3-7 2.3-8 2.3-11 3.3-2
Page No.
Revision No.
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 03/2006 (May 06) 1.1-4>Drawing
Amendment
- Inserted setbacks from site boundary 1.2-3>Item 2.34 - Amended page reference 1.4-2>Type 4-1>Location Insert Music Room 1.4-6>Type 4-6>Location Amended Staff Room 2.3-4>item 3.3-1 - Inserted Trunking & Conduit Index 2.3-7>item 3.58 - Inserted table gridline 2.3-8>item 3.67 - Omitted 2.3 2.3-11>Drawing title - Amended title 3.3-2>Header title - Amended title

Design Handbook For Schools

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Handbook For Schools

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Design Handbook For Schools

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the School Design Handbook?

What is the purpose of the School Design Handbook?

What are some of the key considerations for school design according to the document?

What are some of the key considerations for school design according to the document?

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

Entire Page No. Volume No.

Section No. Section Name

Chapter Name Chapter No. Item No.

Revision Series No. / Date

SCHOOL DESIGN HANDBOOK

Copyright of Ministry of Education 2006

facilities enlarged, renovated or rebuilt to purposefully fulfil the varying

As we resume our journey forward in school design and in garnering

School Design Handbook

> GENERAL <

School Design Philosophy

The FlexSI Framework

FlexSI Design Provisions

Safety & Security / Emergency Planning

Appendices 4.1 4.2 4.4

4.3 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9

Possible Classroom Configurations

External Areas Designed as Learning Spaces

School White Area

Master Revision List Index

1 School Design Philosophy

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

THE SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

SCHOOL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

The appropriate location of green spaces and covered spaces

The orientation of the building blocks in relation to the climate

2 FlexSI Framework and Guideline

Design Concepts 2.3

The FlexSI Framework 2.4 FlexSI Design Provisions

Overview of the Flexible School Infrastructure (FLEX SI)

Modular Flexibility for Classroom Sizes

instead of the standard 90 m2. When the flexibility is not

classrooms through the choice of the movable walls or

Day to day flexibility using movable partitions

with the traditional brick wall classrooms) in terms of

Medium term flexibility using dry wall partitions

flexible classroom configurations.

Facilities with Adaptable Multiple Usages

Furniture & Equipment (F&E)

For instance, the Music Room or AV Room could be

designed so that it could be converted into a recording studio

The effective mode of learning differs from child to child. Facilities

Designing External Areas as Learning Spaces

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

The FlexSI Framework The FlexSI framework is represented diagrammatically as follows:Table 1:

The FlexSI FRAMEWORK

Spirit of Learning the purpose is to promote learning

b) Safety - user safety must not be compromised at all times